
Class _1 A 

Book. 

GopyrightU? 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 




BY 

P. PEARSON 

AUTHOR OF 

Psycho-Harmonial Therapy 
The Lost Chord and Lost Word Revealed 

INVENTOR OF 

THE MECHANICAL HARMONIAL DEVICE 



THE STAR OF KNOWLEDGE HAS RISEN IN THE FIRMAMENT OF HUMAN 
CONSCIOUSNESS, WHICH WILL LEAD ALL MEN TO THE TEMPLE OF 
WISDOM WHERE THEY MAY WORSHIP THE GOD OF ETERNAL TRUTH 

ILLUSTRATED IN COLORS 
FIRST EDITION 



PUBLISHED BY 

THE HARMONIAL PUBLISHING COMPANY 

PONCA CITY, OKLAHOMA, U. S. A. 

1910 



■ffa 



COPYRIGHTED 

BY THE AUTHOR 

P. PEARSON 



Designed, Printed and Bound 

by 

ELLIS PUBLISHING COMPANY 

BATTLE CREEK 
MICHIGAN 

Color Work Executed 

by 

PENINSULAR ENGRAVING COMPANY 

DETROIT, MICHIGAN 



©CI.A271 




{?, {£ > <z*zz^4_<?~?^ 



Presentation 

A single note from the Perfect Whole 

Of life's eternal plan 
Must be in tune — we must strike the key— 

And forever discord ban. 

So the perfect life in harmony ', 
Vibrating from the inner soul 

To the outermost — a melody — 
Sweet tune of Nature's role 

Expressed throughout in perfect unity 
As we live earth's faulty span; 

Rise up, ye Gods of Infinity 
And evolve a perfect man! 

Let him delve into Nature's secrets t 

Sing the music of the heart; 
Tune his life to fit her methods — 

Be of Nature's soul a part. 

— Ellen T. Richie. 



Untrobuctfon 

In the great field of modern as well as ancient psychic 
literature, we find many learned authors attempting to 
solve the momentous problems: How did the universe 
and all things therein come into existence? The prob- 
able aim and ultimate end of all material things? And 
the processes involved in the production of psychical 
and physical phenomena, exhibited in the various realms 
of nature? With no better foundation for their theories 
to rest upon than assumption and belief, hence when we 
undertake to deal with these great questions it becomes 
necessary to state in advance that psychoharmoniai, 
philosophy as promulgated in this work is based upon 
the most solid foundation extant — the all-embracing 
musical scale — which as a Gibraltar rock of truth can- 
not be shaken or overthrown. 

To best accomplish the primary object in view, the 
author of this work has divided the subject matter to be 
considered in three parts or octaves, to be published in 
three separate volumes. 

In the first octave, entitled — 

fl>sscbo*1barmontal pbilosopbs 

will be explained the wonderful processes involved in the 
production of psychical and physical phenomena in 
nature so as to form a basic structure — well supported 
and fortified with impregnable walls of truth — upon 



viii Introduction 

which will be reared in the second octave the invincible 
structure of — 

E>sscbo*1barmoniai Uberaps 

in which will be explained the first original cause of 
health and disease, and the actual processes involved in 
the healing act; all resting upon the great cosmic law — 
harmony — as exemplified in the musical scale — nature 
In the third octave, entitled — 

TKeg to psscbo^lmrmonial IPbflosopbs an& Cor* 

related Uberaps; or, tbe Xost Cborb an& 

%ost TKHorfc IRevealefc 

we will explain the keynote of all sentient beings, as 
the basic foundation of all form expression in individual 
existence, and thus enable the advanced student to cor- 
rectly apply all teachings set forth in the two preceding 
octaves. 

These three octaves have the same relation to each 
other as any three octaves on the musical range of sound 
vibrations, which is of a multiple harmonious nature, 
governed by the law of harmonial progressive reproduc- 
tion. 

We shall ask all qualified readers to ponder well all 
statements which may at first seem to be a little outside 
the common ordinary path of predecessors and con- 
temporaries, for we most strenuously believe in eternal 
progress, a law that is, and must forever continue to be, 
operative in all the various realms in nature. All the 
chapters in the three octaves are so linked together that 
the weight of imparting knowledge and wisdom is recip- 



Introduction x 

rocally borne by the whole chain. These chapters — and 
subject matter — have the same multiple relation to one 
another as the twelve chromatic scales have in music , 
hence each chapter will be dedicated to its respective 
chromatic scale, indicating a certain level of progressive 
unfoldment corresponding to the various subjects under 
consideration. 

In connection with the third octave will be issued a 
separate mechanical harmonial device, a new invention 
which makes it possible for those not familiar with music 
or chromatic chord relations to correctly ascertain their 
harmonial or discordant force relation to any and all other 
human beings, and all other things in nature; the only 
thing required is to touch the button and the infallible 
device does the rest. 

Our new and original explanations of all psychical 
and physical phenomena — resting upon the musical scale — 
will in themselves carry that positive proof which exists 
in the law inherent in the base upon which the phenomena 
rest, hence if correctly stated, cannot be successfully 
refuted or contradicted. 

Our explanations being new and original cannot as 
a rule be supported by quotations from other sources, 
and when given they are not intended as proof, but only 
to show the varied opinions held by others in this or past 
ages. 

Truth is self-evident and really needs no proof from 
an outside source. 

It is with sincere gratitude and delight that we 
acknowledge the assistance rendered by Prof. E. J. 
Hoyt, of Arkansas Cit}^ Kan., by harmonizing our mus- 



x Introduction 

ical problem on our title page, which will no doubt 
be admired by all musicians and lovers of harmonial 
chord relations ; it should be played on the piano with 
an expression simulating the accents in the articulation 
of the words spelled with musical notes. 

Author. 



3 oLAR S y s> 





THE ZONES OF ARCH-ANGELS SURROUND THE WHOLE SOLAR 

SYSTEM, LIKE THE SPIRIT SPHERES SURROUND 

EACH AND EVERY PLANET 



CHAPTER I 

Chromatic Scale of C 



$ 



^^^ -i-j-^ ^ i-i ^ ti ^ i 



^-^-^d « *^-W ^— *= D B 

COSMOGONY 

Cosmogony — world building — majesty's plan, 
Appearing in stars, as worlds, that began 
When gods decreed. Each manifesting skill 
To form, and furnish his Earth, to instill 
His pow'r in a world, evanescent, 'tis true, 
Yet, still for a time, it's a dot in the blue. 
Gods — bound by the law, and so only can do, 
As harmony, wisdom enables them to. 

When promulgating a system of philosophy, it has 
always been customary to start out with some kind of a 
cosmogony in which is given an account of how or in 
what manner the universe and all things therein came 
into existence. 

By philosophy we mean a true explanation of all 
natural phenomena, the picking up and arranging of 
facts so they will form glittering jewels in the crown of 
wisdom. 

By existence we mean a continued state of an organ- 
ized form or being in which such form or being is capable 
of maintaining structural integrity by constant inter- 
change and blending of forces and elements inherent in 
its environments. 

13 



14 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

We admit that such a cosmogony by the very nature 
of things must to a large extent be speculative, because 
the human soul through the mind and reasoning faculties 
cannot, at the present stage of development, penetrate 
into the realm of causation; cannot grasp the meaning 
of eternity in relation to duration of time; cannot com- 
prehend the question of illimitable space involving the 
problem of center and circumference, nor a comprehen- 
sive idea of beginning and ending. 

To say that the universe has always existed, if quali- 
fied, would mean that matter has always existed in some 
form; that the constant change of material substance is 
a result of the action and reaction of correlated forces, 
governed by immutable law. 

To correctly analyze the above statement it becomes 
necessary to go back to the very foundation of things, and 
delve into the depths of the boundless ocean of primary 
forces and elements, that we may bring forth the logical 
conclusion that— LAW, FORCE and ETHER, or ethereal 
atoms with correlated etheric ether, are the primary 
units from which all things that exist have been evolved. 

At this point in our analysis we find one of the greatest 
mysteries in the universe, a problem that will perhaps 
forever remain unsolved — we here refer to the question, 
Can anything exist without some primary cause? 

We hold that LAW, FORCE and ETHER are and 
must have been the primary basis of all things that 
exist in visible and invisible realms, yet the logical ques- 
tion would be admissible ; What caused LAW, FORCE 
and ETHER to exist? Did these primaries come into 
existence without a priori cause, or have they always 



Cosmogony 1 5 

existed; or were they, some time in the very dawn of the 
beginning of things, created by some infinite, omnipotent 
Creator, saying "Let there be light!" that is, mode of 
motion, thus initiating a mode of "motion upon the face 
of the waters," to act upon the ether under laws pre- 
viously brought into existence by a similar fiat? 

Should we accept the above hypothesis many scien- 
tifically inclined thinkers would still be asking the same 
old question : Who created, or by what means did this 
infinite Creator come into existence? Even if some one 
could answer this question it would not solve this unsolv- 
able problem, for the same question could be asked again 
and again, each time bringing you only a step further back 
into the realm of the unknown, with your brain in a whirl 
and your intellect on a strike, refusing to satisfy the in- 
born desire for knowledge in this direction. 

Yet if we must have a Creator as a starting point, the 
creation of LAW, FORCE and ETHER is all that would 
be necessary for an initiative, for with these basic prim- 
aries we can account for the construction of the visible 
universe by logical and scientific methods of reasoning, 
based on the most solid foundation known to exist.* 



*For a clearer comprehension of this subject we submit for due 
consideration the following statement from highly developed spirit 
intelligences through the mediumship of Mrs. M. Klein, Van Wert, 
Ohio: 

"It requires great mental powers to dive to the primal depths and 
rise upward through gradual correspondence of created and inducted 
forces, which weave the fabric network which constitutes Nature's ma- 
chinery, certainly not for merely constructing things visible but 
creating first to a fitness for construction; could you behold the new 
creative processes preceding the construction of a solar system and 
all that is needed to make a world with its teeming, graded life, you 
would observe how the essence of things are moulded in Nature's 
matrix; could you but observe the wonderful processes taking place 
in the slimy ooze and dark waters over which wise spirits hover till 
they correctly ascertain all that is contained therein suitable for seed 



16 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

But where will LAW, FORCE and ETHER exist? 
We have so far not found any account of space being 
created for these things to exist in. We must have 
space to hold the raw material out of which to make the 
universe. It must be conceded that a supposed infinite 
Creator also possessed infinite intelligence and failed not 
to create space wherein to exist or wherein to place a 
newly created universe. 

But some one will say that space and time have always 
existed conjointly with the Creator, which may be true, 
for if the Creator always existed there must have been 
space to exist in, hence the creation of space was un- 
necessary. But we cannot consistently conceive the 
idea of empty space. The existence of a creator in empty 
space is unthinkable, and existence involves the very 
question of time. Now, if space and time have always 
existed we may logically and consistently hold the 
axiomatic postulate that LAW, FORCE and ETHER 
may also equally as well have existed, conjointly with 
space and duration, and a special creation of these 
things were not necessary as a first step toward world 
building. 

We accept as true the conclusive fact: That the 
ethereal atom is the world stuff from which all the 
various solar systems with their attendant planets and 

germs, mark it in its order in compliance with Nature's statutes and 
affix them to correspondences so as to form the weaving apparatus 
which consists of vibratory correspondences in reciprocal activity, 
and what is evolved by the power of spirit aid and force induction 
really seems like something, that in its former state was seemingly 
nothing, and really must be created in this wonderful Nature's creatory 
to become something." 

This idea is corroborated by the illustrious seer, A. J. Davis, when 
he says in "Nature's Divine Revelation": "From an incomprehensible 
nothing a tangible something was created." — Editor. 



Cosmogony 1 7 

worlds have been constructed by the natural processes 
of condensation and consolidation under the law of 
transmutation, wherein the magnetic and electric (posi- 
tive and negative) forces played prominent factors, con- 
trolled and manipulated by intelligent beings on the 
octave of the Gods, clothed with power and wisdom far 
beyond our comprehension.* 

Cosmic LAW, Cosmic FORCE and Cosmic ETHER 
do not in any way in and by themselves manifest intelli- 
gence. Intelligence, as far as we know, is an attribute 
of soul, and can only be manifested by what we will here 
designate by the term SOUL-ENTITY. You may speak 
of infinite intelligence, of infinite power and wisdom, 
but when you have said it ask yourself what you know 
about it. You may, if you like, add the word "belief," 
but will that better the case any? 

ALL INTELLIGENCE, POWERS AND POTEN- 
TIALITIES are inherent in SOUL, and the degree sim- 
ply becomes a question of development along evolutionary 
cyclic spirals on the great highway of eternal progress. 
We thus have SOUL-ENTITIES manifesting intelligence 



*Do we not, as children on this lower plane of existence, build 
playhouses with ABC blocks, adaptable for our use? Do we not 
as men construct things from material already existing in nature, and 
do we not at a later age, with commensurate knowledge and experi- 
ence, manipulate forces and e 1 ements already existing in nature, thus 
generating power for construction of things on a larger scale, relatively 
comparable to our evolutionary stage of progress? This being true 
it will not seem illogical to advance the postulate, that in a future 
state, when all knowledge and wisdom obtainable in this solar system 
has been acquired, giving the advanced soul-entity a merited entrance 
in the realm of the Gods, where opportunity is given for the construc- 
tion of new solar systems in interstellar space from ethereal substance 
already existing there, waiting to be manipulated upon by advanced 
soul-entities with adequate knowledge of cosmic harmony forming 
themselves into groups or electro-magnetic batteries for the genera- 
tion of power necessary for such gigantic operation. — Editor. 



18 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

all along the way from lowest unicellular organism, on 
the low C of the scale of being to the highest C on the 
octave of the Gods. This we designate as the MACRO- 
COSMIC SCALE OF VIBRATIONS, which includes all 
vibratory activities from primate to ultimate. 

Some thoughtful reader will no doubt ask the pro- 
found yet legitimate question: What is the object of 
this stupendous, visible universe? Such a question is 
easier asked than answered, yet with a clear understand- 
ing of macrocosmic evolution we will venture the follow- 
ing answer: The object of the universe is to RAISE 
THE SOUL-ENTITY FROM THE FIRST PROTO- 
PLASMIC CELL TO THE ELOHIMIAN STATE, 
which is typified by the biblical scheme of "salvation 
unto life immortal." 

Cosmic law has been defined by Hudson Tuttle to 
be: "Similar to a groove in which cause runs to its effect; 
a method by which effects are produced; in other words, 
cosmic law is the constitution of the universe." The 
visible universe being a phenomenal effect of a pre- 
existing cause, which under cosmic laws moved along 
lines of least resistance to its ultimate effect, will here be 
accepted as true. But as we cannot reason back to or 
define the first cause in the realm of causation we must 
obviously confine our treatise to some of the chief pro- 
cesses in world building. 

The first step to be taken in the construction of a 
solar system must necessarily be the formation of the 
electro-magnetic chromatic battery on the octave of the 
Gods. Where sufficient energy is generated and con- 
verted into power under well understood laws of cosmic 



Cosmogony 1 9 

harmony, for the purpose of starting the initiative blend- 
ing process of PRIMARY FORCES and ELEMENTS 
in a tremendous, far-reaching vortex whirl, which deter- 
mines the grouping together of harmoniously related 
ethereal atoms, according to their chemical affinities, 
which no doubt is the direct result of a skillful manipula- 
tion of electro-magnetic forces, generated by the great 
chromatic battery on the octave of the Gods.* 

The next step is a natural condensation process by 
which the ethereal atoms, under the law of transmuta- 
tion , are converted into luminous substance. The result- 
ant phenomena when skillfully manipulated by these 
highly developed, intelligent soul-entities, will exhibit 
a homocentric, nebulous, luminous sphere, occupying an 
area in space far beyond our present capacity of compre- 
hension, with positive and negative poles, forming the 
highway upon which the electro-magnetic forces incess- 
antly play with an ever-increasing tendency to keep up 
the motion initiated in the vortex whirl. 

And the recording angel of events makes note of the 
fact that another solar system has been launched in 
space, and started on evolutionary unfoldment toward 
perfection along the line of contraction, moving in its 
spiral, orbital course through illimitable space among 
other similarly yet differently constructed solar systems, 
forming constellations of various degrees of splendor and 
magnitude, f 



*Our definition of the term "The Gods" will be given further on, 
especially in the third volume. — Author. 

fThe multiple star SIGMA in ORION exhibits four colors: Grape- 
red, mauve, blue and white, which presents to the telescopic eye a 
blaze of magnificent scintillations of wonderful beauty in the stellar 
heavens. — Editor. 



20 Psycho-H armonial Philosophy 

In connection with the above postulate a question 
arises which must be disposed of and explained in a 
most logical manner, or else the tremendous scheme of 
constructing a solar system along lines here intimated 
would, by the very nature of the processes involved, 
defeat itself. For it must be remembered that by the 
processes of condensation and contraction of ethereal 
substances diffused in space, necessary for the construc- 
tion of an ordinary solar system, must be many billions 
of miles in diameter, and the contraction at the center of 
such an enormous area would naturally cause an empti- 
ness somewhere else, by reason of the inrushing tide of 
ethereal atoms or corpuscles to refill the space formerly 
occupied by the condensed, contracted and solidified 
substance, which would occupy less space than formerly 
in its original attenuated state. And the legitimate 
question arises: From whence could the inrushing tide 
of ethereal substance come without causing an emptiness 
somewhere else in illimitable space? 

In order to answer this question in a logical and com- 
prehensive way we must compare cosmic operation with 
well known facts connected with organic forms on a 
smaller scale, where we may be able to grasp propor- 
tions and thoroughly understand the formative processes, 
co-ordinate with the processes of disintegration, by and 
through which a perfect balance is always maintained in 
the organic realm of physical nature. 

Let us take for our retrospective study the human 
organism — the microcosm — and we will find that while 
a human form appears by birth and consecutive growth 



Cosmogony 21 

until maturity is reached, another human form after 
maturity declines and disappears in death. 

This well known fact throughout all organic nature 
is simply the balance wheel of materialization and de- 
materialization, producing the constant changes from 
the material to the ethereal realm and from the ethereal 
to the material realm, involving processes well understood 
in alchemy. With this proposition clearly before our 
mind may we not extend this hypothesis into the realm 
of inorganic nature, and yet be within the boundaries of 
reason and logic when we declare that : The processes in- 
volved in materialization and dematerialization and 
evanescence must be applicable to interstellar exchange 
of harmoniously related forces and substances? 

Now if we extend our comparison of the formative 
processes from organic to planetary forms the proposition 
becomes self-evident that planets and solar systems ob- 
viously must pass through similar stages of birth, growth,, 
maturity, decline and death. Hence, it logically follows 
that when one solar system is born another is ready to 
die; when one is growing to perfection along the line of 
contraction another must be in the declining period 
toward old age and final dissolution. Thus the cosmic 
balance wheel is slowly and unerringly turning on the 
axis of eternal duration, while the ethereal and physical 
atoms and corpuscles are constantly kept in a merry 
dance around the cyclic changes constituting the divine 
drama of eternal exist ence, on an infinite number of 
chromatic scales, with an eternal trend toward perfec- 
tion without causing any emptiness or other disturb- 
ance in illimitable space, all governed by the great 



22 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

cosmic law of Harmony, which forms the cosmic groove 
in which all causes run to their ultimate effects. 

Now it may be clearly seen to a comparative certainty 
that if these processes of condensation and contraction 
are continued and intelligently directed, it only becomes 
a question of time, a few billions of years perhaps, when 
the formative processes operating in the construction of 
a solar system will produce the several attendant planets 
or worlds like our own, capable of germinating and 
sustaining intelligent SOUL-ENTITIES, which would 
come into existence by the same process: A BLEND- 
ING OF PRIMARY FORCES AND ELEMENTS, but 
in this case, in conjunction with diffused SOUL principles 
or SOUL essences, which, under the law of involution 
would constitute a triune combination of SOUL, FORCE 
and SUBSTANCE. And the recording angel would 
make a note of this fact in the book of life : That a SOUL- 
ENTITY has been launched on the shoreless sea of being 
and started upon the great highway of ontological exist- 
ence, guided by natural tendencies toward perfection 
under evolutionary laws of unfoldment and expansion, 
on cyclic spirals leading onward and upward all the way 
from the first protoplasmic cell to the Elohimian state. 
See plate No. 2. 

If this were not so, the tremendous scheme of con- 
structing a world, a solar system, a universe requiring 
unnamable numbers of years for evolutionary unfold- 
ment and perfection, would be a foolish expenditure of 
SOUL powers, and the whole scheme of existence would 
be a farce, a ridiculous waste of intelligence without 
definite purpose in view, but simply a play with cosmic 



Cosmogony 23 

LAWS, FORCES and ELEMENTS for self-gratifica-r 
tion. These same ideas have been most graphically 
portrayed in the following poem on " Immortality of 
Mind": 

"Without which chaos might as well have been 
Perpetual, and darkness ne'er expelled, 
The monarch still of his primeval throne — . 
No line of moral continuity exists, 
And everything done by the cosmic Mind, 
Or God, is merely playfulness, and all 
For pastime of eternity ! 
We cannot give force such supremacy, 
For mind and matter hold an equal sway 
With it conjoined in immortality/ ' 

—James Armstrong', 

The great German philosopher, Kant, is reported to 
have said: "Give me matter and I will explain the for- 
mation of a world; but give me matter alone and I 
cannot explain the formation of a caterpillar." 

In connection with the above facts we wish to remark 
that the theory of an almighty God expressing himself 
in the animal, vegetable and mineral kingdoms of nature 
is not a true doctrine. The fact is that every form or 
physical organic structure throughout the three king- 
doms of physical nature, in which motion and activity 
are exhibited, is a manifestation of SOUL, and is simply 
the result of intelligent SOUL-ENTITIES striving for 
progressive unfoldment in their march from octave to 
octave along the great highway of evolutionary attain- 



24 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

ment, with natural, inherent tendencies toward perfec- 
tion. 

"The ancients taught, and we must know 
The universal plan 
Is just the same in heaven and earth 
As that which works in man." — Zamael. 

Eternal energy, the positive force, 

Was projected into negative matter, 
And evolution by degrees then became 

The constructive, ruling part of the latter. 
The unframed universe in its passive state, 

Well responded to the manifest diction 
Of first suggestion, in the "Let there be light," 

The constructive power appeared without friction, 
As Holy Writ truly proclaimed, "There was light." 

The keynote of construction had been sounded, 
Upon the harmonious chord of one, three, five, 

The solid foundation on which was founded, 
All the universes with their evolutionary trend, 

For progressive reproduction of cause and effect, that 
tend 
Along lines of contraction and expansion, 

Always governed by cosmic law of form, 
And according to triune combination, 

Of the primary force and the elements born. 



CHAPTER II 

Chromatic Scale of C Sharp 



$ t% ^ ^ ' g p 



SPIRIT AND MATTER OR FORCE AND SUBSTANCE 

Having so many terms in our present accepted phrase- 
ology, the meaning of which are ambiguous and abstruse, 
it becomes necessary to define these terms so that we 
may be correctly understood when using them, that the 
meaning we intend to convey may not be misconstrued, 
besides making it possible for us at all times to know just 
exactly where we are "at." A true conception of facts 
requires a clear, expressive terminology for the convey- 
ance of these facts to the consciousness of another. 
Differences of opinion on a given subject are often occa- 
sioned by a different understanding of what constitutes 
fact. The first purpose should be to ascertain what 
the facts are, and then will come a discussion of their 
bearing on the main subject. Discussion might be 
avoided if words and terms were rightly understood and 
correctly applied. 

The original meaning of the Latin word "spiritus," 
according to Webster, is "breath" or "wind in motion;" 

25 



26 Psycho- Harmonial Philosophy 

in other words, force or energy. And to avoid all am- 
biguity when using the word spirit in connection with 
matter, we shall prefer using the term Force. Force and 
matter in the final analysis mean positive and negative 
force and element, which constitutes all things which 
exist. Force and matter are at all times co -related under 
multiple harmonious or discordant relations; hence, 
attraction and repulsion, blending and disruption, con- 
struction and disintegration become possible under the 
law that governs. 

There are just as many different kinds of force as 
there are different kinds of grades of matter, and to be 
consistent we must classify matter in five grades or 
divisions, according to density and specific gravity, and 
they are: SOLIDS, FLUIDS, GASEOUS, RADIANT 
and ETHEREAL. All these different grades of matter 
are interconvertible, and can be changed from one state 
to another by lowering or raising co-related force, which 
changes the motion of the constituent units of matter. 
Hence, a skillful manipulation and control of force and 
energy under the law of transmutation will cause form 
to appear and disappear. This is construction and 
disintegration of form only. Nothing is destroyed, 
nothing is lost, only a change in vibratory motion of 
constituent parts. What we call physical matter, such 
as iron, gold, oxygen, hydrogen, etc., only differ to our 
sense perception by the number of grouping molecules 
and the motion of the atoms of which they are com- 
posed. If force could be lost and motion arrested, 
matter, as we know it today, would cease to exist. 

It is absurd to suppose that the atom by virtue of its 



Spirit and Matter 27 

inherent motion should possess inherent potentialities 
of highest known soul attributes, such as intelligence or 
life principle. When we arrive at a true conception of 
motion and how it originates, we cannot consistently 
say that a lump of clay is alive because we observe 
motion and activity of its component parts. This 
atomic and molecular activity has by some been mis- 
taken for a manifestation of inherent intelligence, and 
by some thinkers called corpuscular directivity when it 
is but the result of inherent harmonious or discordant 
relations of the atoms, which, under the action of co- 
related force, governed by immutable law, manifests as 
motion. It is this co-related force which is at the present 
time known as electrons and ions, the units of all force. 
When dealing with motion we should be very careful 
in classifying it according to manifestations presented. 
From this basis we certainly must recognize two kinds 
of motion, which we will here classify as LIFE-MOTION 
and MECHANICAL or FORCE-MOTION. Life-motion 
is a result of inherent soul powers manifesting as life in 
some kind of organic structure or form, said form being 
the immediate and direct result of this power exhibited 
in growth, and various other activities through the 
faculties of WILL and MIND, with unmistakable evi- 
dence of intelligence along lines of least resistance. This 
intelligence always corresponds in degree to the com- 
plexity of the organic form or structure, which again 
corresponds to the stage of development the individual 
SOUL-ENTITY may have attained on the great spiral 
highway of evolutionary progress. Mechanical or force 
motion is the result of inherent power of attraction 



28 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

and repulsion, and whenever intelligence is manifested in 
connection with such motion it proceeds from some soul-en- 
tity, manifesting and directing such force or mechanism 
producing the motion. The intelligence manifested here 
is not inherent in the force or mechanism but originates 
in the one or ones directing the operation. 

Now it may clearly be seen that atomic and molecular 
activity and action of co-related vibratory force are gov- 
erned by the great cosmic law of harmony; and that all 
activities throughout visible and invisible realms, to- 
gether with planetary orbital motion and sidereal motion 
of systems and constellations, are all governed by the 
same law. Hence, we may well say that the whole uni- 
verse hangs upon the law of harmony. And inasmuch 
as harmony is inherent in the all-embracing musical 
scale, it necessarily follows that all nature is established 
on a musical basis; that the great principle of harmony 
embodied in the musical range of sound vibrations is the 
fundamental basis on which the universe is built. 

This new system of PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHIL- 
OSOPHY and co-related THERAPY is based upon the 
musical scale and is governed by the same principle of 
harmony. Hence this system is resting upon the most 
solid foundation extant, and one which can be shaken 
no more than you can shake the very foundation of the 
universe. With such a rock of Gibraltar for a premise 
all conclusions arrived at by the inductive and deductive 
methods of reasoning, when in harmony with the above 
premise, must necessarily be true. 

We have already stated that all phenomena are 
governed by the law of harmony, and it necessarily 



Spirit and Matter 29 

follows that an explanation of the processes involved in 
the production of the phenomena — if true — must accord 
with the law under which the phenomena take place. 
Consequently we hold that the positive proof of the 
truthfulness of an explanation of the processes producing 
a phenomenon exists in the law inherent in the base upon 
which the phenomenon rests. Such an explanation rest- 
ing on a true basis, if correctly given, will always be in 
harmony with all things in visible and invisible realms 
of nature, because the law of harmony governs every- 
where. 

The musical scale as a basis for our philosophy is a 
true exemplification of the law of harmony and discord. 
The seven octaves in our musical range of sound vibra- 
tions have a perfect multiple relation to one another; 
yet by almost unlimited combinations of individual notes, 
harmony and discord may be produced in endless variety 
and degree. The eighth note is the bridge connecting 
a lower and a higher octave, but is always the basis of 
another higher octave of a similar scale, adapted to the 
measurement of higher sounds. This we call the har- 
monial law of progressive reproduction. 

The range of chromatic scales in their inter-correla- 
tions becomes again a true representative of the 
macrocosmic and microcosmic scales of vibrations, 
and the three form the grand, inconceivable major chord 
of C, E, G on the scale of existence. By the macrocosmic 
scale we mean that infinite range of vibratory powers and 
forces constituting all activities and motion existing be- 
tween the lowest vibratory physical atom on the lowest 
C, and the highest vibratory power and force related to 



30 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the ethereal atom on the highest C in the realm of in- 
finitude. 

By the microcosmic scale of vibrations, we mean that 
range of vibratory powers, forces and activities existing 
between the lowest vibratory atom in the human physical 
organism and the highest soul power on the high C of 
the seventh octave in the field of soul powers. This in- 
cludes all vibratory powers, forces and elements operat- 
ing in and constituting the visible and invisible realms of 
the human being. See plate No. 5. 

*'For the worlds were built in order, 
And the atoms march in tune, 
Rhyme the pipe and time the warden 
Cannot forget the sun and moon. 
Orb and atom, forth they prance 
When they hear from far the tune, 
None so backward when the dance 
Finds its place and circumstance, 
But knows the soul-creating sound." 

— Tennyson, 



MACROCOSMIC SCALE OF VIBRATION 

EVOLUTION 



ELOHIM 




ARCH- 
ANGEL 



ANGEL 



SPIRIT 



MAN 



ANIMAL 



VEGETABLE 
MINERAL 




1 



J 



Wgfo 



4 



EVOLUTIONARY PROGRESSIVE UNFOLDMENT OF THE SOUL ENTITY 
FROM THE FIRST PROTOPLASMIC CELL TO THE ELOHIMIAN STATE 



CHAPTER III 

Chromatic Scale of D 



ffizjjE3B E£= ^> J W^ rtl 



INVOLUTION AND EVOLUTION 

Having come to the logical conclusion that there 
never was a beginning of TIME, SPACE, LAW, FORCE 
and ETHER; that these things always existed, and 
consequently always will exist, the doctrine of evolution 
in place of creation seems the most reasonable. 

In regard to creating something out of nothing, 
Lucretius, the brilliant Roman poet, says: "Nullam rem 
e nihilo gigni Divinitas unquani" The gods have never 
produced something out of nothing. 

Percius declared: "Gigni de nihilo nihili in nihilum 
nil posse reverti." Nothing comes from nothing; nothing 
can to nothing return. 

But the construction of a solar system from material 
already existing, when conditions are favorable for the 
operation of cosmic law governing such gigantic under- 
taking, supplemented by evolutionary law, tending 

33 



34 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

toward perfection; may be scientifically explained and 
the evolution of a solar system with its various planets 
and attendant satellites from its primeval nebulous state, 
seems easy of comprehension. 

By evolution here we mean the evolution and per- 
fection of form only; with its attendant and inherent 
force-motion, governed by cosmic law, all resulting from 
a blending of harmonious related PRIMARY FORCES 
AND ELEMENTS. The idea that all the chemical ele- 
ments are built up from some elementary unit of matter 
or protyle, has been long familiar, and has been tenta- 
tively suggested in different forms by many prominent 
scientists. From evidence of spectroscopic examination 
of the stars Sir Norman Lockyer has put forward the view 
that "The matter of the universe is undergoing a contin- 
uous process of evolution. The hottest stars consist 
of the lighter and simpler forms of matter, like hydrogen 
and helium, but at lower temperatures the more complex 
and heavier types of matter appear." This evolution 
of form only is always carried forward by a process of 
contraction, resulting from condensation, which ulti- 
mately by virtue of the initiative vortex whirl-motion 
which is supplemented by the more complex centripetal 
and centrifugal motions, results in the formation of rings 
and planets of spherical forms. These attendant planets 
will, in course of evolutionary processes, become capable 
of originating and sustaining beings of lower and higher 
types, manifesting as life in some kind of physical form 
or structure. This is life-motion with attendant mani- 
festation of inherent intelligence. 

At this point it becomes self-evident that evolution 



Involution and Evolution 35 

is preceded by a co-ordinate involution,* and the pro- 
cesses leading toward perfection are now always along 
the line of expansion. Thus it becomes evident that 
when LAW, FORCE and SUBSTANCE constitute the 
factors of a triune combination, the processes of evolution 
are always along the line of contraction ; but when SOUL, 
FORCE and SUBSTANCE are the constituent factors of 
a triune combination, the evolutionary processes tending 
toward perfection are manifestly along the line of ex- 
pansion and unfoldment. When a planet, after passing 
through the intermediary states of gaseous, fluidic, and 
finally presents a solid material surface, in the archsean 
period of development, there is a time when in this 
latter state that substance may attain certain vibratory 
motion, bearing a perfectly harmonious relation to the 
ever present diffused SOUL ESSENCES, often called 
life principles, that under favorable climatic conditions 
A BLENDING OF PRIMARY FORCES AND ELE- 
MENTS of a positive and negative nature becomes 
possible in conjunction with the ever present SOUL 
ESSENCES, which, by virtue of their harmonious rela- 
tion, blend and become as one in polarity— homocentric. 
The result of this blending is the evolvement of the indi- 
vidualized soul-entity on the keynote upon which the 
blending took place, which becomes the basic foundation 
for the spiritual and concomitant physical structure of 



*By involution we do not mean the action of drawing in from a 
larger sphere to a smaller one, in other words, contraction. We mean 
the action of a soul-entity involving itself into a new combination of 
force and substance, in which, by virtue of inherent power, under 
progressive evolution a new structural material form is produced. 
— Author. 



36 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the unicellular organism called the amoeba, the lowest 
form on the major chord on the scale of being.* 

This blending under the law of harmony is similar 
to the blending of the sound 'waves of C, E, G, on three 
successive octaves, which in their multiple harmonious 
relations blend and become as one in polarity. The 
soul principle or essence has, under the law of involution, 
been involved or blended in with FORCE and SUBt 
STANCE, a marriage between soul and matter, and will 
henceforth be recognized and designated by the term 
SOUL-ENTITY, which at once sets in operation the 



*The latest scientific discovery of a substance called "enzym," 
a yellowish structureless powder when isolated, is said to be the germ 
of life, yet is sterile, without power of reproduction or movement. 
except when in combination with other elements, under harmonious 
blending, motion and energy is developed far exceeding the energy 
observed in radium; this fierce and terrific energy of "enzym" produces 
no structural change or diminished potency, which together with the 
fact that "enzym" is everywhere present and found in all the proteids 
in the milk, in the egg, in grain, and supposed to be the primal impulse 
toward the manifestation of life, caused the chemist in his laboratory 
experiments to formulate the conclusion that "the enzym was a living 
thing, the very germ of life which under given conditions combined 
with elements produced the amoeba, and thus started the evolutionary 
chain and is still necessary toward life of every link in the chain. ' 
With all these scientific explorations in the physical realm of nature, 
it is obvious that the soul principle causing the first life impulses has 
not been discovered in the "enzym," whose energy exhibited when in 
combination with other harmonious related elements is merely the 
result of force-motion, minus inherent intelligence, and power of 
reproduction; it may, however, be the necessary element or constitu- 
ent factor in the triune combination of SOUL, FORCE and SUB- 
STANCE, enabling the soul-entity to initiate the primary impulses 
toward individual existence resulting in life-motion. Another state- 
ment from the discoverer of the potency of "enzym" calls for a careful 
consideration when he says: "That the enzym is a link between ani- 
mate and inanimate matter and is lower than the lowest form of life." 
Such a postulate is unthinkable, for as we have stated elsewhere, all 
forms whether animate or inanimate can only come into existence by 
the triune combination of SOUL, FORCE and SUBSTANCE, or the 
triune combination of LAW, FORCE and SUBSTANCE, and it is 
comparatively certain that there can be no intermediary combination 
of something that does not exist, producing results halfway between 
expansion and contraction, it obviously must be either the one or the 
other. — Author. 



Involution and Evolution 37 

evolutionary laws governing the various processes of 
expansion and growth, which on the next step or spiral 
cycle presents an organic structure of two cells in place 
of one. 

A SOUL-ENTITY in combination with FORCE 
and MATTER has been started on the scale of being, 
striving for existence along lines of least resistance on 
the great highway of evolutionary progressive unfold- 
ment. This unfoldment means an expansive perfection 
of the three constituent primary factors, SOUL, FORCE 
and SUBSTANCE, with inherent attributes, faculties 
and capacities. This is what we call organic nature in 
its various forms of expression. 

For the purpose of comparison we will here introduce 
one of the fundamental statements given out by promi- 
nent scientists regarding the origin of life, as they term it : 

"Life is originated by the contact and coalescence of 
two opposite microscopic, germinal substances, the posi- 
tive and negative principles. This is called polarity." 

This statement is correct as far as it goes, but for 
some cause they have neglected to take into consideration 
and give an account of the most important factor in 
the combination, which is the most essential part because 
it carries within itself the necessary attribute of intelli- 
gence and power; without which the law of evolution 
could not have been set in operation. Without this 
JSOUL PRINCIPLE as an ever acting and directing 
factor in the combination, the attributes of which could 
not have been obtained from non-intelligent force and 
matter, nor life-motion from force-motion, or expansion 



38 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

in place of contraction; something cannot come from 
nothing. 

It is said intelligence is inherent in the atom, but 
have we not, by logical analysis, shown that atomic and 
molecular motion is simply a force-motion, resulting 
from harmonious or discordant force relations, causing 
attraction and repulsion? This fact can be proven by 
an actual demonstration. Systems, planets, satellites, 
yes, all things in nature, move in cyclic spirals, the time 
for completing a cycle varying from one moment to 
millions and billions of years. But we shall only endeavor 
to follow the SOUL-ENTITY along its cyclic spirals of 
evolutionary unfoldment, from the first protoplasmic 
cell to the Elohimian state. See colored plate No. 2. 
It is along this line of constant and continuous processes 
of expansion, governed by the laws of involution and 
evolution, that the SOUL-BNTlTY moves from the 
cyclic spiritual center to the physical circumference for 
manifestation as life in organic form or structure, built in 
conformity to present needs under the law of adaptation 
to environment encountered. And when so-called physi- 
cal death overtakes this individual soul-entity on its 
physical cyclic manifestation, that particular cycle be- 
comes completed, providing propagation of that particu- 
lar species was obtained, and the physical form by the 
process of death is disintegrated and returned to its 
former elements more refined from having been in contact 
with and acted upon by soul forces, leaving the spiritual 
form still intact in which the soul-entity moves back to 
a spiritual cyclic center — a step higher on the line of 
eternal progress — where it may maintain its existence for 



Involution and Evolution 39 

a shorter or longer period of time, according to the present 
state of development obtained. 

But as nothing can remain stationary, existence 
cannot be maintained without activity. Complete inac- 
tivity would result in annihilation. A second (spiritual) 
death becomes inevitable. Death and dissolution of the 
spiritual form is as much a law of nature here as on the 
physical plane. It is only by and through death that the 
critical point can be passed from one existence to another. 
And again, the SOUL-ENTITY moves outward from its 
spiritual center to a new and broader circumference for 
another manifestation of life-motion in combination with 
FORCE and MATTER on a little higher plane of existence. 

Thus shuttle-like, weaving in the loom of nature the 
evolutionary fabric of experimental existence, continu- 
ously increasing in rapidity of rates of motion of all the 
factors constituting the triune combination and expand- 
ing all the faculties of expression and impression. 

THE FABRIC OF LIFE 

"In the loom of life we weave each day 
On the warp of circumstance, 
The colors grave and the colors gray, 
However the threads may chance. 

"But the web is ours to make or mar, 

And the pattern we may choose; 
We may make the fabric strong and fair 
And blend as we will the hues. 

"The glint of gold from our happy days 
May shine through the sombre shades, 
And love's warm gleams, like the morning rays, 
Add beauty that never fades. 



40 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

"When the Master Workman judge at last, 
May he find our weaving good, 
The texture fine and the colors fast, 

And his purpose understood." — Mary Vaughn. 

At first glance these statements may look favorable 
to the doctrine of reincarnation, as taught by the Theo- 
sophists, but mark well the difference: We do not claim 
that the human SOUL-ENTITY goes back from a higher 
to a lower cycle, or continuously bobs up in a different 
form on the same cyclic plane, in accordance with the 
law of karma. If this were the case, no forward move- 
ment could be accomplished. Yet reincarnation, if 
the term be properly applied, is true as a forward move- 
ment on the lower physical planes of being, governed 
by evolutionary laws of expansion and of growth. But 
on the human plane, the apex of the physical pyramid 
of existence, we have reached the high C on the physical 
octave of being, where man forms the bridge between 
the physical and spiritual octaves; where, like the 
eighth note on the musical scale, man becomes the basis 
for a higher octave, adapted to the measurement of 
higher vibratory forces and faculties of expression and 
impression, under the law of harmonious progressive 
reproduction. 

Passing from the physical to the spiritual realm by 
and through the process we call death is indeed the most 
critical point so far encountered by the SOUL-ENTITY. 
So far the life manifestations have all been on the physical 
planes, but at this point the second of the three grand 
divisions of existence is entered with most wonderful 
changes of environment, to which the new form (spiritual 



Involution and Evolution 41 

body) readily adapts itself. And evolution is ready to 
play a new tune on a higher octave, corresponding to the 
great forward movement in this new series of cyclic 
spirals of progressive unfoldment in the spiritual realm, 
where a new order of things with panoramic effect is 
presented to the perceptive vision. 

After the human soul-entity in its evolutionary march 
has once crossed the line between the physical and spiritual 
realms it can no more return to earth for the purpose of 
manifesting as life in a physical organization of its own. 
Yet the possibility exists to do so in the body of someone 
else, under the law of mesmeric and hypnotic processes, 
often called obsession and multiple personality, but this, 
as a rule, is not the law of evolution. 

In referring you to the colored plate No. 2, on page 32, 
please notice the correspondence between the three physi- 
cal kingdoms, MINERAL, VEGETABLE and ANI- 
MAL, and the three spiritual kingdoms, SPIRIT, ANGEL 
and ARCHANGEL, and man as a bridge on F. A king- 
dom is an octave on the scale of being, comprising all 
beings manifesting as life in form or structure, built of 
material adapted to all planeal environments on that oc- 
tave, along lines of similar characteristics and types. The 
higher the octave the greater and more apparent becomes 
the difference between these characteristics and types. 
In the mineral kingdom these types are not sufficiently 
distinct for classification. This, however, may readily 
be done in the vegetable kingdom. But we shall here 
only give a classification of types as they appear in the 
animal kingdom, with a ratio of increase of power and 



42 



Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 



complexity corresponding to the musical scale, as set 
forth in the following diagram: 

THE ANIMAL KINGDOM 

In the same way as each note on the musical scale has 
iinlimited divisional rates in decimal fractions of vibra- 
tion, so has each type of animal 
soul- entity an unlimited variation 
of form expressions, yet always 
MAN following a line which by its pre- 

dominant feature gives each family 
group or species a distinct mark for 
classification, as you will notice in 
the above diagram. Yet not even 
in the same family group can we 
find two forms exactly alike. But 
this will take us too far afield. 

The spiritual kingdoms, often 
called the kingdom of heaven, are 
the seven spirit-angel spheres; 
WORM the three lower ones exist in the 

earth's atmosphere, and the three 
SPONGE highest outside the earth's atmos- 
pheric envelope, with the dividing 
line between the atmosphere and 
ethereal space on F sharp with 
its aural green color indicating 
that this realm or kingdom is harmoniously related 
to the lower as well as the higher kingdoms in that 
peculiar way exemplified in the harmonial relation of the 
green foliage to all the different colored flowers on the 



ANIMAL 



BIRD 



REPTILE 



FISH 



INSECT 



U 



Involution and Evolution 43 

physical plane. The spirit-angels upon this plane by- 
reason of this peculiar harmonial force-relation become 
the intermediary focal point for transmission of ideal 
communication between the higher and lower realms and 
suitable media on the physical plane. See plate No. 3. 
Hermes of ancient times taught "that several zoether 
zones or circles surround this earth, where the souls of 
the dead lived and guarded mortals." 

"Nor have ye left the world, but still unseen, 
Surround the earth as guardians of the good, 
Inspiring souls, and leading them to heaven!" 

— Montgomery. 

The three physical kingdoms, called the kingdoms of 
earth, have the same relations to the heavenly kingdoms 
as the musical notes on a lower octave have to corre- 
sponding notes on the next higher octave. And it is 
only by the process called death that the soul-entity can 
pass from a lower to a higher kingdom ; from the physical 
realm of existence to a corresponding spiritual one. This 
the reader will please bear in mind. "Flesh and blood 
cannot enter the kingdom of heaven." "Unless ye be 
born again ye cannot enter the kingdom of heaven," 
says the Bible. Death is the doorway that leads to 
spiritual realms. Death of the physical form of man is 
in reality spiritual birth into spiritual or heavenly king- 
doms, where manifestation as life is continued on a 
higher octave adapted to higher vibrations and higher 
activities of expanded attributes and faculties. 

The necessity for some kind of refining process of 
the spiritual body without discarding the same at the 



44 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

point of demarcation from a lower to a higher sphere 
must be obvious; and that this refining process is of a 
gradual expansive unfoldment all through the seven 
spheres until the high C on the seventh octave has been 
reached, where the SOUL-ENTITY meets with a still 
greater and more critical point to be passed, which means 
that a complete separation from the planet earth and its 
spherical environment must be accomplished if future 
progress and attainment are to be gained. 

It is here where the law of evolution leads the soul- 
entity over another high C bridge, which again becomes 
low C or basis for a still higher series of octaves adapted 
to the unfoldment of still greater possibilities, commensu- 
rate with expansion of soul attributes, adapted to mani- 
festation as life on the exalted and glorious zones of 
archangels, surrounding the whole solar system in the 
same way as the spirit spheres surround the earth and 
each one of the planets belonging to the solar system. 
See colored plate No. i. At this point on the great high- 
way of evolutionary unfoldment all remaining earthly 
conditions are eliminated by a death-like process simu- 
lating and corresponding to physical death. It is the 
death of the spiritual body, hence a spiritual death, by 
which the spiritual body is changed in the second resur- 
rection for a grander, more glorious and resplendent soul- 
body adapted for manifestation as life (motion and activ- 
ity) in the zones of archangels. 

"From life to life we cannot go 

Without the aid of Death, 
The power that frees us here below; 

And speeds our parting breath. 



Involution and Evolution 45 

"And when, in yonder spirit land 

We reach a great divide, 
And, lingering and bewildered stand 

Before the other side. 

"With subtle force then Death again 
Will twine his arms around us 

To help us to a higher plane 
Than that whereon he found us. 

"Nor even then his work will cease; 

A further change awaits us, 
When Death, by causing fresh release, 

To loftier spheres translates us," 

This death is referred to in the Bible as the spiritual 
death. In Revelation xx, 6, we read : "Blessed and holy 
is he that hath part in the first resurrection ; on him the 
second death (spiritual) hath no power." The language 
in this text certainly does imply that there is a second 
resurrection, and that those who have no part in the 
first resurrection will be subject to the power of the 
second death, and consequently have no part in the 
second resurrection that brings the human soul-entity 
into power and glory. By the first resurrection is meant 
the rising of the human soul-entity, clothed with a spir- 
itual body at the time of physical death. The resurrec- 
tion at the time of death of all beings below man is only 
for a limited existence at their cyclic spiritual center, and 
it is over these lower beings that the second (spiritual) 
death has power, for they were not written in the book 
of life as human beings. With this understanding, let 
us read the above text with our modern interpretation: 
Blessed and holy are those SOUL-ENTITIES who have 



46 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

attained to the human state of progressive unfoldment 
that completes all physical manifestation in the physical 
realm, and are prepared to take part in the first resurrec- 
tion into spiritual realms, for over them the second 
death has no power. SOUL-ENTlTlES, or all beings 
below man, after their physical death maintain an exist- 
ence in their spiritual bodies for a length of time corre- 
sponding to their degree of unfoldment until the second 
(spiritual) death overtakes them, which has power over 
them and compels them under natural laws to seek the 
physical circumference of their spiritual cyclic center, 
and again manifest as life in the physical realms a step 
higher on the scale of being. At spiritual death the 
spiritual body is dissolved and returned to the primary 
elements by a similar yet different process from the one 
dissolving and returning the physical body to former 
material states. John the Revelator refers to this process 
when he says in his twentieth chapter, fifteenth verse : 
"And whosoever was not found written in the book of 
life was cast into the lake of fire." Lake of fire can mean 
nothing but nature's laboratory, wherein forms are 
quicky dissolved and returned to primary elements. Fur. 
ther on the Revelator makes this explicit statement: 
"THIS IS THE SECOND DEATH." This subject will 
be more thoroughly discussed in the third volume. 

If we have now been rightly understood, the mooted 
question, "Do animals have souls?" may now be easily 
answered. Correctly speaking, animals do not have 
souls; they are souls. Or whether animals and vegetables 
exist in spirit realms ? must now be clear to every thought- 
ful reader and easy of comprehension. 



Involution and Evolution 47 

The following Bible statement from the ancient seer 
will be also more clearly understood : "The soul of man 
goeth upward, whereas the soul of the beast goeth down- 
ward." 

We shall now follow the soul-entity through another 
octave on the great highway of evolutionary progress 
in the seven zones of the archangels surrounding our 
solar system like an aural cushion. See plate No. i. 
It was no doubt a section of these zones or belts of resplen- 
dent beauty that the modern seer, A. J. Davis, saw 
clairvoyantly and called "The Summer Land." After 
an archangel has successfully passed through the seven 
spheres or zones comprising the Summer Land, and 
reached the high C on this, the grandest and most glorious 
octave on the scale of being in our solar system, and 
become the possessor of all wisdom, power and knowl- 
edge existing in this solar system, the evolutionary laws 
of being are still pressing forward until the Elohimian 
state on the next octave is attained, when the ultimate 
goal, the object of the universe, has been obtained. The 
soul-entity that started as a soul-germ in the first pro- 
toplasmic cell has at last by involutionary and evolu- 
tionary processes of unfoldment completed all the cyclic 
spirals from the low C to the high C on the great macro- 
cosmic scale of being, and by virtue of last diploma be- 
come as one of the gods, "knowing good and evil." See 
plate No. 2. 

The attendant processes in passing this critical point 
of evolutionary progress with changes necessary for 
adaptations to new environment — no doubt governed by 
evolutionary law — for manifestation on the octave of 



48 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the gods — kingdom of the gods — cannot be known or 
even surmised by the human mind, but in the telescopic 
universe is unmistakable evidence of the operation of 
evolutionary law on the octave of the gods. For the 
telescopic eye reveals to us the existence of solar systems 
and orbs far grander in magnitude and resplendent 
beauty than our own solar system, so that we may logi- 
cally conceive of the possibility of an infinite number 
of chromatic scales corresponding to the infinite number 
of variegated stars in the vast realms of illimitable space, 
and we can but surmise how the gods, under the great 
cosmic law of harmony form themselves into chromatic 
circles on certain keynotes and thus construct powerful 
electro-magnetic chromatic batteries in space, where 
force and power are generated sufficient for the initiative 
vortex whirl as the first step toward the construction of 
a new solar system, which spontaneously seems to blaze 
up in our telescopic field as a newly discovered nebulae, 
and another solar system has been started on its gigantic 
cyclic spirals toward perfection, governed by the great 
cosmic law of harmony. 

"Know ye not that ye are gods?" — Bible. 

"The breath becomes a stone, 
The stone becomes a plant, 
The plant becomes an animal, 
The animal becomes a man, 
The man becomes a spirit, 
The spirit becomes a god." — Jewish Cabala. 

"Wrapped within the acorn 
I,ay a mighty tree, 



Involution and Evolution 49 

Leaves, roots, trunks and branches 

In possibility. 
Then earth and sun and showers 

Caressed it in their glee, 
Till it burst its tiny prison 

And stood forth grand and free. 

"And day by day it struggled 

Its soul-self to express, 
For what was there unfolded 

A stranger ne'er could guess. 
And when at last a monarch 

It towered over all, 
Who would e'er think it rested 

Once in a house so small. 

"Within a darkened chamber 

A newborn baby lay, 
Helpless, weak and useless, 

A perfect piece of clay. 
But as the years rolled onward 

The child became a man, 
The child within evolving, 

Declared 'I will, I can.' 

"And as the world first pillowed 

On ether's boundless sea, 
Contained within its matrix 

All possibility. 
Through laws of evolution 

E'er reaching for the best, 
It sacrifices ever 

To nature's stern behest." — Laura B. Payne. 



CHAPTER IV 

Chromatic Scale of D Sharp 



mm ^^^^^^m 



SOUL 

THE MANIFESTING ENTITY THROUGHOUT NATURE 

"March on, O, halting soul, march on ; 
At most the way is not so long. 
'Tis better than the way you've come, 
And each day brings you nearer home. 
O, tired soul, march on!" 

— Nettie. 
The origin of life-motion, as a manifestation of soul 
in an organic form, or structure, has been made clear in 
the preceding chapter. It has also been shown how this 
manifestation of life-motion increased in power com- 
mensurate with advancement on the great highway of 
eternal progress. At this point, no doubt a thinking 
reader would ask, What is a soul-entity? Having duly 
considered this subject we frankly admit we do not 
know, but we shall attempt to define some of its attri- 
butes, and at least mention some of its varied manifesta- 
tions in combination with force and substance. But we 
must first settle the many different terms used by philos- 

50 



Soul 51 

ophers, authors and speakers as synonymous, to in some 
way, according to each one's understanding, mean the 
same thing. Many lexicographers define soul to be 
Spirit, Life, Mind, immaterial, intelligent substance, 
animating principle, that which distinguishes man from 
the brute, and many others too numerous to mention. 
When we use the term Soul in this work, we shall expect 
to convey but one meaning, which we shall try to make 
clear to the reader, so as to preclude all possible misun- 
derstanding. To use the term life as synonymous with 
soul is absurd on the very face of it. Life is not an 
entity, but appears to our sense perception as a manifes- 
tation or mode of motion. To distinguish this mode of 
motion from other similar motions we have designated 
it as life-motion. LIFE, as a manifestation or mode of 
motion, cannot be that which manifests or produces the 
motion. SOUL is life, yet life is not soul, but partakes 
of the nature of soul. An effect cannot be the cause of 
itself, though it partakes of the qualities of the producing 
cause. 

This explanation holds good in reference to all the 
other so-called synonymous terms mentioned, and can 
be more clearly understood when illustrated by the 
musical scale. High C is low C by virtue of having not 
only 258 vibrations per second but 517, yet low C partakes 
of the nature and quality of high C by reason of having 
258 out of the 517 vibrations per second. This relation 
holds good between any of the higher and lower notes 
on the scale, and can be applied to all things in nature 
where a higher and lower active principle is in evidence. 

To know is no greater virtue than to know that you 



52 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

do not know. Both are virtues of a high order. We 
have said we do not know the component parts of a 
soul-entity, for we have not yet climbed to the abode of 
the gods and stolen their thunder and lightning of su- 
preme wisdom, as Prometheus is said to have done, 
but the gods may have sent ministering angels down the 
shining highway of telepathy and kindled the fire of 
inspiration on our altar of aspiration. 

"Now on a sudden I know it, the secret, the secret of life. 

Why the very green of the grass in the fields with be- 
trayal is rife. 

The whirr of the grasshopper by the wayside proclaims 
it to all. 

'Tis unrolled as a scroll to all eyes in the curve of the 
waterfall. 

But for me, I can only wonder at mortals — the secret 
out; 

For they see, hear, taste, smell, feel not, what heaven 
reveals all about." — Henry Lyman Koopman. 

"There are moments, I think, when the spirit receives 
Whole volumes of thought on its unwritten leaves, 
When the folds of the heart in a moment unclose, 
Like the innermost leaves from the heart of a rose." 

— Amelia B. Welby. 

The triune combination we call man has been shown 
to be the result of a blending of positive and negative 
forces and elements in conjunction with ever-present soul 
essences, or germs, at a time when evolutionary processes 
had brought about favorable harmonious relations be- 
tween these three factors. Without this harmonious 
relation constituting the grand chord on three consecu- 



Soul 53 

tive octaves, there could have been no blending and no 
concentering. 

These ever present diffused soul essences can be 
conceived of as emanations from a universal ever-flow- 
ing, infinite soul-fountain. It may be called OVER- 
SOUL, GOD, INFINITE FATHER, ALLAH, OHM, 
or any other term for that matter, for it makes little 
difference what terms are used when dealing with the in- 
comprehensible, the unknown. 

The attributes of soul may be defined as INTELLI- 
GENCE, CONSCIOUSNESS, FEELING, EMOTION, 
ASPIRATION, DESIRE, MEMORY and INDIVIDUAL- 
ITY. The inherent power of soul is OMNISCIENT, OM- 
NIPOTENT and OMNIPRESENT, manifested in a degree 
corresponding to the realm in which it exists or the stage 
of development it may have attained in the successive 
steps of evolutionary progressive unfoldment; having no 
place in time, no discontinuity, but a progressive, expan- 
sive manifestation of consciousness in combination with 
force and substance. Self -existence is a problem never to 
be mastered by reason. That which thinks cannot com- 
prehend itself. Soul is the manifesting entity through- 
out all organic nature as an essential, immortal part of 
all organic beings with inherent powers for all its needs. 
The ever present diffused soul-essences being a manifesta- 
tion of, or an emanation from, the infinite ever-flowing 
soul-fountain, cannot be that soul-center from which it 
emanated as a soul-germ, but it partakes of the nature 
of that infinite soul-center, as was truly set forth alle- 
gorically in Genesis i, 27: "In the image of God created 
he him, male and female created he them." From this 



54 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

point of view it is illogical to affirm that soul is a spark of 
divinity itself, a part of that which is called God, an 
essential portion of the infinite. 

The following illustration will more fully support 
our claim and make clear our conception of the nature 
of soul and its relation to the universal, ever-flowing 
soul-fountain : From the electric spark between the positive 
and negative carbon points in the electric arc lamp 
radiate rays of light in all directions. This light is not 
the spark from which it emanates, but as an effect it 
partakes of the nature and property of the spark which 
is its cause, and as an effect it is impossible for it to be 
its own cause, yet it becomes the cause of another effect 
next lower on the scale. Hence we may truly say that 
the universal ever-flowing infinite soul-fountain is soul; 
but soul is not a part or essential portion of the soul- 
fountain, but as an effect it partakes of its nature and 
qualities inherent in its attributes. 

The human soul, being the essential, immortal part of 
man, is above all other component parts or factors in the 
triune combination called man. Hence by inherent 
capacity it becomes and is the ruling factor in conscious 
existence. In all departments of nature the positive 
forces always govern and control the negative, because 
they are above the latter, that is, possess greater rap- 
idity of motion, just like high C on the musical scale is 
above low C and all intermediate notes. The positive 
and negative relation simply becomes a matter of degree 
corresponding to each note's relative position on the 
scale, a mathematical problem easily solved. The human 
soul being the most positive factor and the only ruling 



Soul 55 

principle in man it becomes plain that nothing else in 
man or his environment can autocratically set up or 
claim ownership of soul. Yet we always hear the in- 
consistent expression, "my soul," "your soul," "his 
soul," etc. If these words mean anything they mean 
that something which is designated by the term me, 
you, him, does claim ownership of soul, which is really, 
in fact, the I, the you and the him, as expressed in the 
attributes of individuality. A master may say "my 
slave," but a slave should not say, "my master." It is 
inconsistent to say in our prayer, "Our Father, who 
art in heaven," etc. Just leave out the "our." Also 
when you sing "Nearer, my God, to Thee," it would be 
more correct to sing, "Nearer to God I be." When two 
things are equal in quantity and quality they become 
concentered, and really are one in polarity — homocentric 
— and neither can claim superiority over the other. 
Applied to marriage relations it would abridge the use 
of the phrase "my husband," "my wife." The husband, 
the wife, or using the proper names would be correct 
and scientific. It is true, unfortunately, that with the 
present understanding of marriage relations so very few 
are mated in accordance with nature's law, hence are 
not homocentric or at-one-ment in polarity, and master 
will rule from one side of the house and slave will obey 
from the other, the terms applicable to master and slave 
having in our ignorance been accepted as correct. 

Students of PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY 
can always be identified by the correct use of these 
terms. When speaking of ownership the question natur- 
ally arises, What do we as individual soul-entities own, 



56 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

provided we own anything? It is not land, money or 
treasures of any kind; not even our physical and spirit- 
ual bodies, for of these things we only have possession 
for a limited time. We can only claim ownership in 
those things we can take with us in passing from one 
realm of existence to another; those things which are a 
part of our being all the way through the three grand 
divisions of existence, the physical, spiritual and soul 
realms, and that is the attributes of the soul, i. e., in- 
telligence, consciousness, emotion, feeling, aspiration, 
desire, memory and individuality. In the physical 
realm physical propensities and characteristics predom- 
inate, while spiritual principles predominate in the 
spiritual realm, and in the soul realms, the zones of arch- 
angels, soul attributes predominate. It is to be under- 
stood that in soul realms the triune combination of 
SOUL, FORCE and SUBSTANCE as primary factors 
still exist as constituent parts of being, but the soul 
principle and its attributes are predominant. 

For the purpose of comparing notes with the mater- 
ialistic idea of soul we will quote one of their definitions 
of soul: "The human soul is a force resulting from the 
reaction promoted by the union of the different atoms 
of the body; this force is transformed into thought and 
intellectual acts." In this definition they do not tell us 
how an unintelligent force is transformed into intelli- 
gent thought and action; how an unconscious force 
attained the attribute of consciousness, and so on with 
reference to all the soul attributes. 

The materialistic comprehension of soul is on a level 
with Topsy's understanding as to her birth. When 



Soul 57 

questioned in regard to this matter she said, "I wasn't 
born, but jist growed up." And it naturally folio ws that 
the materialist's soul will be on a level with Topsy 
when death overtakes it and stops the growing process, 
the uniting of different atoms; hence the reaction pro- 
moted thereby comes to a standstill and annihilation 
would be the natural result in such case. 

Scientists talk about chemical souls. Dr. T. J. 
Hudson tells us about tissue souls, which primarily would 
mean histionic souls, concerning which Haeckle says: 
"The tissue soul is the higher psychological function that 
gives psychological individuality to the compound multi- 
cellular organism as a true cell commonwealth. It con- 
trols all the separate cell souls of the social cells." We 
shall let the reader consider, digest and try to assimilate 
the meaning of the above cunningly worded definition, 
and then make a logical comparison ; the verdict from a 
fair and unbiased standpoint could be nothing but 
favorable to our side of the question. 

It has been computed that there are 600,000,000 brain 
cells, which would mean that many soul-entities in the 
brain alone. These, of course, would naturally be of 
the highest order, saying nothing of the untold billions 
of cell souls in the balance of the body, of all grades and 
degrees, and "that cell soul that controls all the separate 
cell souls of the social cells" would have a job on hand 
not to be envied. And as a cellular structure is con- 
stantly changing by the death and expulsion of the old 
cells, to be replaced by new ones, what becomes of the 
cell soul in such a crisis? Is it to die with the cell that 



58 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

gave it birth, or will it come forth as a new cell soul in 
the new cell? 

All intelligent people, regardless of religious or non- 
religious belief, will admit the prevailing fact that there 
is a power behind the throne, or rather on the throne, 
that originates all activities in the human organism, 
which under the law of harmony, often called chemical 
affinity, intelligently constructs atomic and molecular 
cell forms, and that this constructive power must exist 
before the atomic action forming the cell union can take 
place. In their strenuous endeavor to find a loophole 
of escape our materialistic friends thoughtlessly hitch 
their intellectual wagon before the horse of reason, and 
do not always know which way they are going or where 
they are "at," floundering in deep water without rudder 
or compass, not knowing that as long as they worship 
at the shrine of fallacy and error they cannot enter the 
temple of wisdom and worship the God of eternal truth. 

Because of the generally prevalent opinions regarding 
the true classification and meaning of the terms soul and 
spirit, commonly held to be synonymous, it becomes 
necessary for us to clearly define the difference between 
the two, as factors in the triune combination called man. 
At the outset we admit that our contemporaries may 
seemingly have good reason for using the term spirit to 
convey the same idea we do when using the w r ord soul. 
No doubt this incorrect form of expression is a lingering 
adherence to the old dogmatic ideas of the past. Simply 
because a sage, seer or prophet in olden time used the 
word spirit with such understanding does not make it 
the best term for us to use. There is even a possibility 



Soul 59 

of a mistake in translations, as translators to a large 
extent invariably color their translations with their own 
preconceived ideas and opinions, hence a true conception 
cannot be had from such authority. It is not the auth- 
ority we want so much as the real facts. An opinion is 
worth nothing except so far as it is related to the real 
thing. The unity of truth, the co-relation of inherent 
ideas, the harmonious correspondency and fixed relation- 
ship of things, constitute the central charm of all intel- 
lectual efforts and of all research. The venerable Dr. 
Peebles says: "The terms soul, spirit, life, ego, sub- 
conscious self, I am, used interchangeably, constitute 
literally a confusion of tongues, unlike in the original 
and having different shades of meaning, and should be 
used with understanding based on a true conception of 
the human being. Discussion would be avoided if words 
and terms were rightly used, understood and applied." 
As long as the term spirit is used synonymously with 
soul there will always be trouble along the line of a clear 
conception of the primary constituent factors in the 
human being. This naturally leads to so many different 
opinions and views concerning the nature of psycholog- 
ical processes by which different phenomena are pre- 
sented for investigation. 

The investigators seldom agree in their explanations 
of any of these phenomena, for the simple reason that 
they have not a true conception of the human being, or 
rather the human soul in which lies concealed the true 
basis of all psychic phenomena. 

If the term spirit is the correct one to use in place of 
soul, the term psychology should be changed to spirit- 



60 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

ology. To attempt to define psychology as the science 
of the mind is absurd, for mind, like spirit, intelligence and 
other attributes, have their proper place on the scale of 
a true classification of powers, forces and faculties opera- 
ting in the invisible realm of the human being, which will 
be clearly set forth in our next chapter. 

PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY, when fully 
understood, presents truths that fall in line like dove- 
tailed segments, held in place by the great law of har- 
mony. By interlocking and welding these links of 
truths together the chain formed will be as strong as its 
strongest link, and when these links are closely examined 
there will not be found a single weak link in the chain. 
Behold the star of truth is risen and the truly wise men 
of earth come forth to welcome it. 

"Soul sleeps in the stone, 
Grows in the plant, 
Stirs in the animal, 
Wakes in man." 

"Sing on, O joyous soul, sing on! 
Thy music is from heavenly spheres. 
'Twill banish all our earthly fears 
And turn to smiles our falling tears. 

So, joyous soul, sing on!" — Nettie. 



< 

00 

> 

H 
O 

J3 

< 

zi > 

o xi 

§1 



00 w 



< >< 

z 51 



O rn 
z < 

m 
H z 

S eg 
> -I 



m 




CHAPTER V 

Chromatic Scale of E 



I 



tftr^i j^~> f w\ p 



SPIRIT 

ONE OF THE PRIMARY CONSTITUENT FACTORS IN THE 
TRIUNE COMBINATION CALLED MAN 

The original meaning of the term SPIRIT, being 
Force (breath of life), will be strictly adhered to in this 
work. When using the term SPIRIT as defined in the 
subheading of this chapter we want to convey the idea 
that SPIRIT is that cohesive force which by its polar 
attraction, governed by Soul power, under harmonial 
relations holds together Soul and substance as a triune 
combination, exhibited in all physical and spiritual 
organic forms and structures, in visible and invisible 
realms of nature, generally known under following classi- 
fication as physical and spiritual kingdoms : 

Mineral j 

Vegetable > Physical kingdoms. 

Animal J 

Man j- The Connecting Link. 

Spirit "j 

Angel > Spiritual kingdoms. 

Archangel ) 
See colored plate No. 2. 

61 



62 



Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 



This triune combination of SOUL, FORCE and 
SUBSTANCE (we use the term substance advisedly, 
being equally applicable to physical solid matter as to 
the most refined ethereal substance), when applied to 
man would mean SOUL, SPIRIT and BODY, inter- 
blended in such a way that separation under no con- 
ceivable circumstance can ever take place. It will 
always be SOUL, SPIRIT and BODY, hence it is illogi- 
cal to talk about a disembodied soul — meaning soul 
minus a body. The body, be it physical, spiritual or 
any other kind of body, will always be adapted 
to the kingdom in which the soul is manifesting as life, 

for the purpose of advancement on 

Uthe great highway of evolutionary 
Resurrection and progressive unfoldment. When- 
I ever a change is made from one 

* DEATH kingdom to another, death of the 

old body is the only process by 
which the change can be accom- 
plished ; which under natural condi- 
tions should only take place in the 
fullness of time, at a ripe old age, 
not only at three scores and ten, 
but at seven scores, a full octave as 
set forth in the adjoining diagram. 
We are well aware of the pos- 
tulation held by well informed 
modern spiritualists, that the 
human soul with its spirit body 
can and does, under trance condi- 
tions, separate from the physical 



j 



OLD AGE 



TOUTH 



CHILDHOOD 



U 



BABYHOOD 



BIBTH 



Spirit 63 

body, which is left in a state of coma, a seeming cessa- 
tion of all physical and organic functional activities, in 
many instances simulating death; roaming through 
space at will or guided by spirit beings into spirit 
realms and other places as invited visitors from 
the earth plane. The same hypothesis holds sway 
in the mysterious doctrine taught by the Theosophists, 
where it is said to be a projection of the astral body at 
will, to some degree even in a semi-conscious state. The 
same phenomenon was called "doppleganger" in old 
German folk lore; by others called wraith, apparition 
and even objective thought form. These several propo- 
sitions accepted as explanations of seemingly, and no 
doubt thought to be, actual self-experience, are simply 
sophistry resting upon nothing better than assumption 
and belief without any logical support or proof, resting 
on no basis of truth. If truth is desired and not a 
string of additional witnesses in favor of preconceptions 
and foregone conclusions, all biased and prejudiced 
opinions must be surrendered or held in abeyance until 
facts have been logically presented and proven to be 
true. Self-experience is by many held to be the best 
proof obtainable, but it is not always so, especially in 
psychic investigations, for self-experience may so easily 
be misinterpreted under a biased condition of the mind — 
education gives in many instances a bias to the mind — 
and often lands an honest investigator very far from 
the real truth. 

The more we study the triune combination called 
Man in its various aspects and complexities, the more 
do we become most thoroughly convinced that a separa- 



64 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

tion of the three primary constituent factors, Soul, 
spirit and physical body can, under no conceivable cir- 
cumstances, ever take place except by and through the 
natural process called death. Death and disintegration 
of the physical body is the natural process under which 
the spiritual body may be resurrected and born into the 
next kingdom above. 

This is the spiritual birth. Death is the only door- 
way by and through which the human SOUL-ENTITY 
can pass from the physical realm into the spiritual realm 
of existence. Each one of the several groups of animals 
is particularly adapted to its own provisional elementary 
environments, be it earth, water or air; change these 
environments and death is the natural result. A fish 
commits suicide when jumping out of a pond of water 
onto dry land. A mammalia commits suicide when jump- 
ing into a pond of water from which there is no avenue of 
escape. Of course we speak of those species adapted 
only to their own natural elements. It certainly would 
be suicidal for a human being to jump into kingdom 
come by a single leap, disregarding nature's provisional 
doorway called death; and then expect to pull himself 
back by the so-called magnetic cord connection and 
reestablish former normal activities, and again take 
up the thread of conscious existence in the physical 
realm just where he left off. 

If there ever were such a thing as a miracle performed, 
this would certainly be the most incomprehensible; but 
there is no such a thing as a miracle, nor any super- 
natural power of any kind; all things have been, are 



Spirit 65 

and always will be the result of natural laws and forces 
operating in their respective realms. 

A physical illustration may better convey our mean- 
ing to the reader's consciousness: increase the tension 
of the E string on a violin from the natural tone to which 
it is adapted up to the corresponding note on the next 
octave above and see how quick it will snap in two. 
The higher up we go on the scale of being the more 
certain is disintegration an unavoidable result from 
change of environment, without a preparatory process 
of adaptation. 

The E string on the violin, as well as all other things, 
has its limitation at the beginning and ending of functional 
activity; beyond this limitation nature has put up the 
sign of the skull and crossbones with the superscription, 
"He that enters here leaves all hope behind." 

Nature in its forward march must by evolutionary 
processes, operating through the agency of birth and 
death, transform a fish into a reptile, a caterpillar into 
a butterfly, before they can become denizens of a higher 
octave and exist under new conditions and elementary 
environments. 

In all the various departments of organic nature 
this seems to be the law of harmonial progressive repro- 
duction which must be observed by the SOUL-ENTITY, 
marching from octave to octave on the great highway of 
evolutionary unfoldment. 

When studying deeply into the trance state it becomes 
self-evident that there is no separation of the three pri- 
mary factors, SOUL, SPIRIT and physical BODY, con- 
sequently we must look elsewhere for an explanation 



66 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

that will solve the problem involved in the phenomenon 
of trance visions, as we will call those experiences sup- 
posed to be real visits in ethereal spirit realms. 

No one will be called upon to at once accept our 
explanations without first becoming thoroughly familiar 
with the teachings of Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy as 
set forth in this work, where an overwhelming number 
of facts will be found to support and logically prove our 
allegations. 

The subject of trance and all similar phenomena can 
not be discussed further in this chapter, for the student 
must first thoroughly understand the processes involved 
in producing the trance state and the laws that govern, 
which will be fully explained in the 8th chapter of the 
first octave, where we will present our new explanation 
of the mesmeric and hypnotic processes in such a clear 
and simple way that even if you are on a run you can 
read and fully understand it. 

When using the term "a spirit" we intend to convey 
the idea of a spirit being existing in ethereal spirit realms ; 
consequently the term "a spirit" will have the same 
relation to the organic form or spirit body, as the term 
"a man" has to the physical organic form or body. 
When a clairvoyant sees a spirit form or body it is 
always communicated to others by saying: "I see a 
spirit," just as when we see a physical form or body we 
say, ''there is a man," or "we see a man." 

The stereotyped phrase, "We are spirits now," can- 
not logically be used when we have a true conception of 
the meaning of the term; as long as we are physical 
beings on the physical plane we cannot be spirit beings 



Spirit 67 

on the ethereal plane. A physical human being may be 
a spiritual being but not a spirit being. But if it be said, 
we are soul-entities now and here as much as we ever 
will be, with a proper qualification regarding limitations 
of physical conditions that we are subject to, the idea 
presented would be more in harmony with facts. 

The ethereal spirit body is not a mould upon which 
the physical body is built to be slipped off and on as 
may be desired, as many well informed modern writers 
seem to think; the ethereal spirit body is built up simul- 
taneously with the physical body, cell for cell, tissue for 
tissue, comprising the whole structure. Being such a 
wonderfully interblended combination of integral ethereal 
substance and physical matter, a separation cannot 
under any conceivable circumstance possibly take place 
except by and through the natural process called death, 
yet it must be understood that the ethereal substance 
exists first and that the physical, so-called, matter re- 
sults from a condensation process under the law of trans- 
mutation which under harmonial force-relation trans- 
forms the ethereal substance into physical matter, that 
is, the two forms of matter appear simultaneously the 
moment the cell is organized — a harmonial reproduction 
on a descending and ascending scale — contraction and 
expansion, the two great principles in evolution. This 
process of growth and expansion can only take place in 
a natural order when harmonial relations exist between 
SOUL, FORCE and SUBSTANCE; hence only har- 
moniously related ethereal atoms can be appropriated 
by virtue of their adaptability to become polarized with 
the homocentric compound forming the whole structure, 



68 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

each atom playing its tune in the natural keynote of the 
soul according to its vibratory rate of motion. 

This harmonious grouping of atoms and molecules is 
due to the invisible and intangible polar attraction of the 
soul-entity which results in manifestation of life-motion 
in the physical organism, through the higher faculties 
of WILL, MIND and THOUGHT. But as long as this 
combination exists in the physical realm it will be held 
there by natural physical laws, subject to limitations under 
existing predominant physical conditions and environ- 
ments. 

SPIRIT 

"There is a mean, a state between, 

What is named soul and matter, 
That has a sway, is present alway, 

Helps to draw and to scatter 
The fragrant flowers, make sweet the bowers, 

And the air, too, is active. 
Who wholly sees, their changing degrees, 

Or how each is attractive? 
Ah ! in all states, a power relates, 

In a way known as spirit ; 
And in mankind, it is seen defined, 

In a way to inspire it. 
The pulses time with melody's rhyme, 

That without were distraction ; 
Spirit and Soul combined in the whole, — 

Are the spheres of all action." — Lisle E. Saxton. 



MICROCOSMIC SCALE OF VIBRATION 



SOUL 



WILL 



MIND 




THOUGHT 



MAGNETIC 



ELECTRIC 



SOUND 



4feb 



4 



A TRUE CLASSIFICATION OF POWERS AND FORCES OPERATING IN 
THE INVISIBLE REALM OF THE HUMAN BEING 



CHAPTER VI 



Chromatic Scale of F 



^^ ^-H i fcfr= N 



MAN 

THE APEX OF THE PHYSICAL PYRAMID OF FORMS 

By the very nature of physical conditions the term 
MAN has become more and more related to the physical 
body which can be seen. It is only by and through the 
five physical senses that we can come in contact with 
and receive impressions from the external world. It is 
by and through these senses that we are able to compare 
and judge from the ever present element of contrast 
the relation one thing holds to another, hence differentia- 
tion in all departments of nature become only relative 
conditions. 

To reiterate, the term MAN has by customary usage 
become a relative term, signifying the physical body 
which we see. If we think of an absent person, we always 
construct a mental picture of the physical form pre- 
viously seen. If we speak of a person that we see walk- 
ing at a distance, we always say, "There goes Mr. So and 
So," referring to the moving physical body, or personality 

71 



72 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

we see. Person means mask or covering, hence person- 
ality means anything pertaining to the covering or form ; 
this definition will be strictly adhered to in this work. 

The average human being never stops to think about 
that which causes the movement of the body. When 
you look at a clock you see the dial upon which the 
hands point out the time of day — you never think about 
the mainspring that causes the movement of the hands 
on the dial. When this movement stops for some 
cause or another, you say the clock has stopped, when 
in reality it was the mainspring that has stopped furnish- 
ing the mechanical force or power that moves the hands 
on the dial. This mainspring with its attendant mechani- 
cal works may be incased in different varieties of forms 
under different names, according to degree of com- 
plexity, yet in all cases the mainspring is there as the 
essential part of the clock, hence is in reality the clock, 
all other things that go to constitute a clock are sub- 
ordinates. The mainspring is the central source of all 
mechanical motion in a clock. 

In MAN all activities in the visible and invisible realm 
of his being are the direct result of the power inherent in 
the human soul, which is the mainspring, the essential, 
immortal part, to which all other constitutent parts 
become relatively subordinate factors; hence the human 
soul is the body, but the body is not the soul but par- 
takes of and manifests the nature and qualities of the 
soul; the various functional activities in the physical 
organic structure on the physical plane, and the spiritual 
organic structure on the spiritual plane of existence, 
which constitute prominent factors in individual exist- 



Man 73 

ence, always tending toward evolutionary expansive 
unfoldment of inherent potentialities. These activities, 
infinite in variation and degree, we have designated as 
life-motion. This life-motion cannot be the result of 
the physical nor the spiritual brain only, for these organs 
have no more life-principle inherent in their millions of 
cells than any other part of the physical or spiritual or- 
ganism. It is simply the instrument by and through 
which the human soul, through the faculties of will and 
mind produce all these activities and motions and govern 
the same along lines of least resistance; these activities 
in some cases become automatic when resistance is of a 
degree that does not necessitate a direct action through 
the will, hence are called involuntary actions in physiology 
to distinguish them from voluntary actions in which 
volition is the predominant factor. 

We cannot accept the postulate of a wholly invol- 
untary action in any part of the human organism, for 
that would mean an inherent power in that part exhibiting 
a so-called involuntary action; which cannot be true for 
various reasons that will be clearly explained in the 
second octave of this work. We simply here set up the 
claim that all activities, whether voluntary or so-called 
involuntary, originate in the human soul, where all 
power pertaining to the human being inherently resides. 
When by the process called death, the human soul with 
its spiritual form is separated from the physical organism, 
all functional activities of the physical organism stop; 
this so-called death causing all physical activities in the 
physical body to stop, appertains to the physical form 
or body only. 



74 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

"Life is real! Life is earnest! 
And the grave is not its goal ; 
Dust thou art, to dust returnest, 
Was not spoken of the soul." 

— Longfellow. 

The materialist doubts the possibility of a conscious 
existence of the human soul after physical death, yet is 
ready to accept the theory of the indestructible quality 
of the matter of which the human form is constructed, 
claiming matter and correlated force will always exist 
because it has always existed; why then should not that 
which is potentially far above matter and force and 
possesses inherently the power to control and govern 
force and matter to the extent of being capable of build- 
ing its own physical form, equally as well always exist 
in a conscious state, capable of exercising all its inherent 
attributes in a spiritual, organic structure on a higher 
.octave of existence, conforming to the law of harmonial 
progressive reproduction. 

The very evolutionary processes in nature prove that 
there is a great difference between inherent life-motion 
and force-motion, for whenever life-motion is exhibited 
in connection with force and matter as a result of inher- 
ent soul power, the evolutionary processes toward per- 
fection are always along the line of expansion; whereas 
when motion is the result of correlated forces the evolu- 
tionary processes toward perfection are always along 
the line of contraction. These are self-evident facts in 
nature and cannot be successfully contradicted. No 
one need entertain any doubt about the immortality of 
the human soul, for all things are immortal, which means 
endless or everlasting existence. Nothing can perish or 



Man 75 

be lost. The idea that immortality is a state or condition 
only to be attained by persistent efforts or by appropriat- 
ing some one else's saving power, by faith or otherwise — 
who has been supposed to have brought immortality 
to light, when immortality has been the dominant idea 
in all religions in all ages of the past — cannot be true. 

The idea of obtaining a thing which is legitimately 
ours by birthright would imply that all those not being 
able to make a successful effort and consequently failing 
to attain the immortal state, would perish and be eter- 
nally lost or annihilated is unthinkable and unscientific. 

If only one atom, infinitesimal as it is, should be lost, 
the universe, as a whole, would be incomplete, balance 
and equilibrium would be affected, harmony and the 
blending of primary forces and elements would eventually 
cease to be the basic process in world-building. All 
cosmic activity would finally come to a standstill and 
annihilation would be the ultimate result. 

Attainment of immortality only means a higher 
degree of planeal existence, with a corresponding higher 
degree of perfection and therewith connected happiness, 
manifested in wisdom, knowledge and power, with an 
ever-present desire for attaining yet higher degrees of 
perfection over in the beyond, hidden in the eternal 
future. "Be ye perfect as the Father in heaven is per- 
fect." 

"Go on, spotless mortal, in the path of virtue; 
It is the way to the stars ; 
Offspring of the gods thyself — 
So shalt thou become the father of gods." 

By the indiscriminate manner in which the term 



76 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

MIND has been used by modern writers and authorities 
it becomes apparent to every intelligent reader that 
MIND is not correctly understood, nor the term properly 
applied. The ambiguous definition and use of this term 
as synonymous with soul is unscientific and unfortun- 
ately always results in confusion, discussion and contra- 
diction in which the true conception of the human being 
is plunged deeper into the cloud of darkness and mysti- 
cism, where factor and faculty, idea and thought, MIND 
action and Soul power become conspicously distorted, and 
ambiguous and chaotic conceptions are inevitable. 

We will now give a true classification of powers, forces 
and faculties operating in the invisible realm of the human 
being, based upon the musical scale. See colored plate 
No. 4, entitled Microcosmic Scale of Vibrations. The 
student will here study closely the corresponding multiple 
relations existing between this classification and the 
notes- on the musical scale and the seven prismatic 
colors as presented in the rainbow in nature. Scientists 
have by actual measurements of radiated color vibrations 
ascertained that their vibratory rapidity of motion have 
a perfect multiple relation to their corresponding notes 
on the musical scale; and we teach that colors are 
simply the result of radiated color vibrations impinging 
upon our visual sense organs where the optic nerve sys- 
tem responds to these impulses, and transmits them to 
the optic nerve centers in the posterior cerebral brain, 
where the mind takes them up and according to educa- 
tional capacity interprets the cipher message and trans- 
mits the result to the realm of consciousness where the 
particular color is seen as indicated in the cipher message 



Man 77 

which consisted of a certain number of impulses per 
second related in frequencies to a corresponding note on 
the octave of sound vibrations. See colored plate No. 4. 
The perceptive faculty of what we call vision is located 
in the optic nerve center in the back part of the brain. 
The expansion of the optic nerve forming the nerve 
screen that lines the retina of the eye conveys to the 
optic nerve center in the brain all visual impressions of 
form. It is by these processes that we are able to form 
correct conceptions of quality and quantity of external 
material objects. And as the human being is preemi- 
nently a part and parcel of nature which has been shown 
to be established on a musical basis, it is obvious that 
the human being is at all times subject to musical laws, 
and, of course, there must be, and is, a perfect relation 
in the same way as all other things in nature are vibratorily 
related. 

The low C and high C is the primate and ultimate and 
constitute the two extremes of the musical scale — yet 
perfect harmony. The fundamental law of every de- 
partment of organic nature seems to be beginning and 
ending — Alpha and Omega — manifested in perfect and 
complete harmony. Two extremes meet, embracing each 
other in a homocentric blending process and become as 
one in polarity, expressed in most marvelous details in 
their mathematical and geometrical perfections. This 
procession of primate and ultimate forms the endless 
cyclic spirals of harmonial progressive reproduction in 
their march from octave to octave, sounding the Divine 
music of the spheres. 

The student should understand that each one of the 



78 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

seven notes on the scale on colored plate No. 4 represents 
seven octaves or a field of vibratory activity on the micro- 
cosmic scale of vibration, where certain definite manifes- 
tations of phenomena may be observed. This gives us 
49 octaves in the range of Powers, Forces and facul- 
ties operating in the invisible realm of the human being. 
Add to these the 35 lower octaves belonging to the physi- 
cal or visible realm of the human being, and we have 
altogether 84 octaves on the microcosmic scale of vibra- 
tion, which is the range and limitation of all activities 
ascribed to the human being, the epitome of the Universe. 
The figures given on the colored plate above referred 
to indicate the rate of frequencies of low C on first octave 
and high C on the seventh octave of each individual field, 
which again are represented by the seven prismatic 
colors according to their relative position on the octave 
of color vibrations, which comes in on G on the micro- 
cosmic scale, and their relations to MIND have been 
hinted at in the common expression, "Illumination of 
Mind." In our classification, based upon the musical 
scale and the corresponding seven prismatic colors, we 
place the human soul on B with violet as the correlated 
color. There is a range of vibratory activity from 
142,180,597,366,784 vibrations per second, representing 
soul-power on low C on first octave — to 18,199,116,462,- 
948,352, representing soul-power on high C on the sev- 
enth octave which again becomes the low C of the next 
octave, with multiple relation to white containing all the 
colors. White, with its multiple harmonial relation to 
high C, represents a series of octaves in the realm of 
infinitude, which, as the highest octave on the macro- 



Man 79 

cosmic scale of vibration above the human soul, has 
been denominated THE ELOHIMIAN STATE— octaves 
of the Gods. 

The human WILL comes next in order when descend- 
ing the scale and has its position on A with its corre- 
sponding color of purple. There is a range of vibratory 
WILL powers from 1,110,785,916,928 vibrations per 
second on low C on first octave of this field to 142,180,- 
597,366,784 on high C on the seventh octave. Next in 
order comes MIND, located on G with its corresponding 
color of blue, presenting a range of vibratory activity 
all the way from 8,678,014,976 vibrations per second 
on low C on first octave to 1,110,785,916,928 vibra- 
tions per second of vibratory MIND power on high 
C on the seventh octave. The WILL and MIND are 
always to be considered as faculties or avenues of 
expression and impression; the intermediaries by and 
through which the human soul comes in contact 
and does business with the gray matter in the brain — 
which results in life-motion in the physical organic form 
or structure, or impressive and expressive intellectual 
functions. 

The impressional function of the MIND is to receive, 
interpret and transmit to the realm of consciousness all 
vibratory impulses coming from its own domain or from 
any other external source through the various nerve 
centers in the brain that govern the five physical senses 
whose duty is to receive and transmit all vibratory 
messages coming through the sensory nerve system con- 
nected with the five physical sense organs. This dual 
nerve system has been called in physiology, afferent and 



80 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

efferent — efferent (carrying from), afferent (carrying to); 
in other words, the efferent nerve system is the avenue 
of expression and the afferent nerve system the avenue 
of impression. 

The great Poughkeepsie seer, A. J. Davis, who had 
clairvoyant glimpses of the human brain, describes the 
convolutions to consist of seven distinct layers of brain 
cells. These layers or spheres of different shaped cells 
having alternate different shades of color tints, the inner- 
most or first one being of a reddish tint corresponding 
to the red tinted band in the rainbow, and low C on the 
scale, is the most distinct. The other colored tints have 
a more direct correspondence to the location of the human 
being on the scale, which is a natural result of the re- 
lation the electric and magnetic forces hold to each other. 
This will be fully explained at the proper place in this 
work, also the noticeable fact of the red colored band 
being on the outside of the rainbow in the cloud. 

That the human WILL should precede the MIND in 
our classification can easily be demonstrated by every 
individual that so desires, by self -study; for is not mind 
action governed through the will except when such action 
has become automatic by long continued functional ac- 
tivity under lesser and lesser frictions along lines of least 
resistance? Hence the MIND must be subordinate to 
WILL and have its position on the scale of classification 
accordingly. 

The next in order as we descend the scale of classi- 
fication is THOUGHT, located on F with its corre- 
sponding green color, with a vibratory range of activities 
from 67,796,992 vibrations per second on low C on first 



Man 81 

octave of this field to 8,678,014,976 impulses per second 
on high C on the seventh octave. Thought per se is not 
an idea. An idea is often spontaneously born in the human 
soul or implanted by an external soul-entity through the 
great avenue of impression, but more often an idea is the 
result of sense impressions whereas thought is simply 
the result of mind activity on the brain cells; an idea 
that springs up in the human soul may after successive 
processes of volition and mind powers be referred to the 
intellectual department in the cerebral brain, where 
under mental processes it may be reduced to thought 
form, which ultimately may be crystallized and formu- 
lated into words and action in the little brain called 
cerebellum. These processes are the transference of 
the ideal into the actual, where thoughts become the 
feeding springs of correlated actions. 

Some of our New Thought friends set up the claim 
that thought is the greatest power known, that the 
"power of thought created the world," etc. We think 
that the thoughtful reader can now clearly see that there 
is no inherent power in thought; thought being a result 
of MIND activity upon the brain is simply a vibratory 
force that has a perfect multiple harmonious relation to 
F on the musical scale. See colored plate No. 4. 

Prentice Mulford is responsible for the paradoxical 
phrase, "Thoughts are things," but he never told us what 
kind of things they are; yet he is right, for that which 
is, is something and that which is something cannot be 
classed as nothing, hence thoughts are something, just 
that kind of a thing we have described above. We can- 
not think a new thing into existence, but we can think 



82 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

about a thing that does exist. "As a man think eth so 
he is," is a very much misquoted and misunderstood 
text; although it may seem plausible on the surface, it 
weakens and becomes obsolete when probed down to 
bed rock. It may be possible that translators are re- 
sponsible for transposition of words here, which so often 
is the case when translators color their productions by 
preconceived ideas; we are rather inclined to believe 
that the Psalmist originally expressed his ideas correctly 
and no doubt said, "As a man is in his heart so he think- 
eth,"and as he thinketh so he will act; these acts consti- 
tute estimated character which as an opinion of others 
becomes a supposed reputation. Reputation is what 
other people think you are. Character is what you really 
are. "From the heart goes out evil thoughts," etc. 

A man is not a horsethief because he thinks about 
stealing horses; he thinks about stealing horses because 
he is a horsethief at heart; perhaps he is a horsethief 
from pre-natal causes before he could even think about 
stealing horses, and so on. To follow up this line of 
argument would take us too far afield. Whatever 
results may come from the act of thinking along lines of 
health conditions will be taken up and duly considered 
and explained in the second octave of this work, where 
it properly belongs. Now it is hoped that students will 
be able to make a proper differentiation between ideas 
and thought, between so-called power of thought and 
power of the human soul, where all power pertaining to 
the human being inherently resides. 

On the next two descending steps on the scale we 
find the magnetic force on E and the electric force on D. 



Man 83 

The magnetic force occupies a field of vibratory activity 
from 529,664 vibrations per second on the low C on the 
first octave and ranges through a series of octaves 
culminating on high C of the seventh octave with 
67,796,992 vibrations per second. This field of mag- 
netic force expressions represented by the primary color 
yellow, has its multiple relation to E on the musical 
scale. The phenomena presented in this field such as 
the X-rays and N-rays are not so well understood. 
Radio-activity as pertaining to the human body belongs 
to this field. Radio-active substances emanating from 
the human body have long been known and established as 
a fact, and if our scientists had not been afflicted with 
radio-active blindness they could long ago have dis- 
covered radio-activity in the human body and the steel 
magnet, both emanating a luminous force of a reddish 
tint from the south pole and of a bluish tint from the 
north pole without loss of mass. The student must here 
recognize the difference between the human electro- 
magnetic force and the electro-magnetic force radiat- 
ing from the horseshoe magnet, the former having by 
virtue of the vitalization process taking place in the 
human being, become a vital electro-magnetic force 
(N-ray) or vital motive energy. The phenomenon of 
radium is but a demonstration of the principle of self- 
replenishment through and by exchange of force and 
substance metamorphosed in the vortex of inflowing 
energy at the neutral point; thus like the mag- 
net constantly receiving harmoniously related cosmic 
energy which becomes transmuted into corresponding 
substance and regenerated into electro-magnetic energy 



84 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

at the central vortex and projected through its positive 
and negative poles. 

The electric force on D has a range of vibratory rap- 
idity from 4,138 per second on low C on first octave and 
comes to the line of demarcation on high C on the seventh 
octave with 529,664 vibrations per second. In this field 
of vibratory activity represented by the orange color, 
the phenomena presented are well understood and classi- 
fied by science. The electric and magnetic forces are 
very much alike and differ only in rapidity of motion, 
constituting a higher and lower order of positive and 
negative quality and when harmonious relations exist 
blend and become as one in polarity and are then called 
electro-magnetic — a compound. This can easily be dem- 
onstrated and may be witnessed in nature where it always 
results in equilibrium and balance. Look at the bolt of 
lightning projected from a positive cloud to a negative 
cloud or a negative point on earth ; the blending of positive 
and negative forces of the two clouds establishes equilib- 
rium between the two points. This subject will be more 
clearly elaborated on in the second volume, when we 
come to explain the vitalization process taking place in 
the human being to the highest degree of perfection 
because of the most perfect organized being occupying 
the very apex of the physical pyramid of forms. 

Coming down the scale to low C, which represents 
the seven octaves of sound vibrations, commencing with 
32 vibrations per second on low C, this being the lowest 
tone that can by the average person be clearly heard, 
and classified as low C, yet perhaps more than one octave 
below this sound can be heard, one-half of which may be 



Man 85 

classified by a trained musician and tuner, but we must 
accept the average qualified person as a standard of 
measurement. The high C on the seventh octave with 
4,138 vibrations per second, is the last tone that can be 
clearly heard and classified by the average person, yet 
sounds may be heard three octaves above, but the seven 
octaves will be accepted as the average limitation of the 
auditory sense perception of the human being. Yet to 
be more explicit, we may say that the limitation of sound 
vibrations ranges from perhaps 8 or 10 vibrations per 
second to 32,768 per second; above or below these limits 
the human auditory organs and nerves do not respond 
nor receive or transmit sonorific impulses, hence no sound 
is heard, although vibrations above this point may 
impinge and bombard the ear drum with no appar- 
ent result. 

All vibrations are silent. This, of course, also in- 
cludes sound vibrations, hence when a brass band plays 
a piece of music, no sound is really produced, they simply 
collectively produce a mass of harmonious or discordant 
silent vibrations. All those vibrations that blend are 
harmonious; those silent vibratory waves that strike 
crest against crest, bumping along like a train of cars 
that have left the track and run along on the railroad 
ties, are discordant. 

The process of hearing is similar to the process of 
seeing, smelling, tasting and feeling, and when we explain 
one we have virtually explained all processes pertaining 
to the five physical senses. For example : When the silent 
vibrations of G on the fourth or middle octave impinge 
on or strike the ear drum with a frequency of 387 im- 



86 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

pulses per second, the ear drum responds with the 
same identical number of vibrations per second, just as a 
tuning fork responds to another vibrating tuning fork of 
the same pitch. The same result is exemplified in the 
telephone receiver; these impingements of silent vibra- 
tions are taken up by the adequately arranged links of 
bone connections in the inner ear, called in physiology 
malleus, stapes and incus y which transmit the silent vibra- 
tions to the sensitive and receptively adjusted auditory 
nerve system, which receives and transmits these same 
387 silent vibrations to the auditory nerve center in the 
brain. The central office, where the human MIND, like 
the telegraph operator receives the silent cipher message 
of 387 impingements or impulses per second, defines and 
interprets the number of impulses according to its edu- 
cated capacity and transmits the translated message to 
the realm of consciousness where the human soul as an 
intelligent conscious entity hears the sound of G as a true 
translation of the cipher message of 387 impulses per 
second. People used to believe that the pain was felt 
in the finger or foot that was hurt, when the pain was 
really felt in the realm of consciousness as a result of the 
continuous messages coming from that part of the body 
affected. 

Now we have made a comparatively clear explanation 
of a true classification of powers, forces and faculties 
operating in the invisible realm of the human being which 
the thoughtful reader will understand without any diffi- 
culty; and when this true conception of the human being 
is attained, with all details well in hand, the road leading 
to further advancement will be clear from all rubbish 



Man 87 

accumulated during the long reign of superstition and 
ignorance that has culminated in a dense cloud of mysti- 
cism. 

The five lower fields of activity in the visible realm of 
the human being are fairly well explained in physiology, 
hence no necessity of taking up that subject here. We 
shall duly consider all physical organic functions when 
we come to deal with the subject pertaining to pathology 
in the second octave. It has been shown that all evolu- 
tionary processes, whether they be along lines of con- 
traction or expansion, always tend towards perfection, 
which would indicate that all things are moving on 
towards perfection, which, however, seems to be of such 
a nature that it can never be attained. 

"On the shoreless ocean of eternity 
The human soul progresses on 
From lowest to the highest purity, 
Always seeking what lies beyond." 

If the possibility existed within the human soul to 
reach a point of perfect transcendental perfection, no 
more knowledge to acquire, no more wisdom to obtain, 
all progress would inevitably stop right there and then. 
This would simply mean annihilation; for existence 
minus activity is unthinkable and unscientific. At this 
point of our analysis there are two propositions worthy 
of consideration: A continuous, eternal progress with 
identity preserved; or absorption into the Hindu Nirvana, 
that is, falling back into the original, everflowing, infinite 
soul-fountain, which would mean annihilation of self- 
identity. If the latter be true then all that had been accom- 



88 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

plished along the great highway of evolutionary progres- 
sive unfoldment would stand for nothing, only marking 
the tracks of a fool's play. Yet we will admit that this 
latter proposition has many points in its favor, but as far 
as we ourselves are concerned we accept the former as 
true, for inasmuch as self-preservation is the axiomatic law 
of nature we shall at all times during all eternity strive 
for the preservation of our self-hood with that strong 
desire for existence which is inherent in the human soul. 
It is the keynote upon which the soul-entity first came 
into existence, which will always remain as the everlasting 
identity by which we will be known throughout all eter- 
nity. The fundamental law of nature is that as long as 
man exists on this mortal plane he should at all times 
enjoy health, happiness and prosperity. This is attain- 
able only when man so adjusts himself to physical, 
spiritual and moral environments that there will be no 
friction, that all activities will move along lines of least 
resistance. This means perfect harmony in all the 
different departments of being, when each and every 
atom and integral part plays its tune harmoniously 
related to the keynote that governs upon all the 84 oc- 
taves, upon which the whole organization exists and is 
subject to. 

With the soul as musical composer and director of 
this wonderful orchestra of life, the human being should 
daily and hourly be sounding the Divine music of eternal 
existence. 

"In a temple so clean, pure and white 
It will ever let in the golden light 



Man 89 

Of truth, wherein the soul can see 
The way to light and liberty." 

"This world is not conclusion — 
A sequel lies beyond 
Invisible as music 
But positive as sound." 

"The triune combination of man we can trace 
In beauty of form and movements of grace. 
No dangers, no obstacles,— nothing commands 
The perfected man, on the apex he stands 
The crown of the physical pyramid. Ah ! 
With pow'r to direct Nature's forces and draw 
Her secrets from oceans, from mountains, from sky, — 
A triune of harmony, errors decry. 
A sage of creation he moves up the height, 
The key of Earth's melodies, music's delight." 

— L. E. Saxton, 



CHAPTER VII 



Chromatic Scale of F Sharp 



§ nJ] i g j^-j-^- n r ft n 1 1 



AURA 

THE HUMAN AURA ON F SHARP 

The discovery of that wonderful substance called 
radium by Madame Sklodowska Currie, a Paris lady of 
scientific attainments, which possesses the property of 
radio-activity, that is, a continuous radiation of a luminous 
force without co-ordinate disintegration of substance 
nor apparent loss of mass, is a challenge to the truth of 
Professor Faraday's statement "that nowhere is there 
a pure creation or production of power without a corre- 
sponding exhaustion to supply it." This phenomenon 
of radio-activity has caused a change of conceptions as 
to the real nature of chemical activity, and it is now 
generally conceded by scientists and laymen that not only 
radium but many, if not all, material substances and 
organized forms to some degree display radio-activity. 
This new discovery refuses to fit into our present chemical 
system. It stubbornly refuses to obey all our carefully 
framed laws governing matter. It even threatens to 

90 



^\JRA ON P 



^ 



^ 



«Wfy 




IN A PERFECT HUMAN BEING ON F SHARP THE PRISMATIC 

COLORS IN THE AURA HAVE THE SAME POSITION 

AS THEY HAVE IN THE RAINBOW 



Aura 93 

compel a complete revision of scientific teachings unques- 
tioned during the last century. But in all these scientific 
speculations concerning this ''new chemistry' ' science 
fails to recognize the true relation existing between? 
Force and Matter, their interchangeableness under the 
law of transmutation which may be observed in every 
department of nature's domain wherever form and func- 
tion is produced and carried on for the purpose of mani- 
festation of life or life-motion. 

The same phenomenon of radio-activity has long been 
witnessed in our commercial horseshoe magnet, whick 
constantly emits and radiates force in space and yet 
loses absolutely none of its mass. These radiations are- 
clearly seen by the clairvoyant, showing a beautiful tint 
of blue from the positive (north) pole and a reddish tint 
from the negative (south) pole, corresponding exactly 
to the blue tinted emanations from the positive (right) 
hand and the reddish tinted emanations from the nega- 
tive (left) hand of the human being. 

The phenomenon of radio-activity is but an objective 
demonstration of the principle of self -replenishment by 
exchange of substance metamorphosed in the vortex of 
inflowing energy; thus like the magnet constantly form- 
ing and generating electro-magnetic currents whose 
inflow and outflow are transmuted into substance and 
energy at its central vortex, or to be more explicit, as a 
number of atoms are being converted into their corre- 
lated force at the central vortex and projected into 
space at the north and south poles, a corresponding 
amount of energy inflowing at the neutral point is con- 
verted into correlated atomic matter to take the place 



94 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

vacated by the former process, but we must understand 
that the two processes take place simultaneously — a 
stream of ions and electrons undergoing a double trans- 
mutation process in the magnet. However, let it be 
said that all living beings in their spiritual and physical 
form structures have luminous emanations radiating 
from their bodies ; these emanations correspond in degree 
to the grade of matter forming the body and the complex- 
ity of the organization. The very atom is said to have 
an ethereal atmosphere of its own, even in the most 
solid compounds; this is proven by the fact that all 
material substances can be compressed into a smaller 
space than originally occupied in nature. Even the 
earth itself has an ethereal spiritual aura surrounding 
it outside of its atmosphere; these luminous belts or 
etheric spheres are constantly being formed by the 
ascending finer sublimated forces and substances emanat- 
ing especially from human beings on the earth. These 
emanations "have been computed to approximately 
amount to thousands of tons annually/ ' which ascend 
upward through the atmosphere until coming to a point 
where levity is equal to the specific gravity, where the 
established equilibrium compels a halt and like the earth 
itself there finds a resting place — a home — in space, yet 
chained by the law of gravitation to its parent planet 
and rotates with the earth as an integral part thereof. 
(See colored plate No. 3.) 

When we consider the enormous speed of these re- 
volving ether belts, we have a clear examplification of 
the most paradoxical fact in nature which declares that 



Aura 



101 



A critical reader will notice that our table of vibra- 
tory reflected color rays does not correspond with the 
tabulated color vibrations of A. J. Davis in his "Stellar 
Key," which is here reproduced so the reader can by 
comparison clearly see wherein he is mistaken : 

TABLE IN "THE STELLAR KEY" 



Undulations Vibrations per 
Color Length of Ware per Inch Second 



WHITE 



TIOLET -SS *™ ch * f Un 5 d 9 ^° OIls 720 Bill. pr Sec. 
PURPLE -^ Tnch° f UndtCons 658 Bill, pr Sec. 



RlfTP iM Mil. of 51,110 -„„.,.« 

BLUE 10 Inch Undulations « 2 « Bill, pr Sec. 



auvv\ g11 Mil. of 47,460 -„- Dni a 

GREEN -j^ Ineh Undn i ationg 677 Bill, pr Sec. 

YFriftw 151 Mil. of 44,000 KOK w .„ 

YELLOW -^ Inch rjndnlations 685 Bill, pr Sec. 

ORANftF — MH « 0' 41,010 - nA B|n nm - 

UKASbt 10 Inch Undlllation8 506 Bill, pr Sec. 



RED 



^ M ^K° f «Mi° 458 Bill, pr Sec 



10 Inch Undnlations 






w 



u 



102 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

In the first place he does not comply with the com- 
mon rule that is applicable in vibratory activity for 
determining the intervals comprising an octave. When 
he commences his scale with 458,000,000,000 vibrations 
per second he does not commence on low C of a natural 
scale but a quarter of a step below A on the sixth octave 
in the fifth field (see colored plate No. 4), and ends on 
G sharp with 720,000,000,000, which makes his compu- 
tation nearly correspond with the scale of A major which 
commences with 470,000,000,000. Now add about 
45,000,000,000 for the half step between G sharp and A, 
and we reach A with 765,000,000,000 which really in fact 
should be just double 458,000,000,000, which is 916,000,- 
000,000. Here his computation falls short 151,000,000,- 
000, which equals about two and one-half steps on his 
own octave, consequently his computation cannot be 
correct. 

Our computation of radiated color vibrations is based 
upon the natural scale of C on the seventh octave in the 
fifth field with the same ratio of increase of vibratory 
activity as we have in any one of the seven octaves in 
the field of sound vibrations, consequently each and all 
color vibrations are classified according to their multiple 
relation to the notes on the musical scale. 

The following diagram gives the comparative relation 
of increase of vibrations on each step and half step on 
our natural scale of C and A. J. Davis's scale of A major, 
where a striking divergency becomes apparent. 



Aura 103 

PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHIL. "STELLAR KEY" 



Colors 



C Natural 

Oi the 7th octave in the 5th field 



A Major 

On the 6th octave in the 5th field 



WHITE 

....62 Billions.... 

VIOLET 

...114 Billions.... 

PUBPLE 

.102 Billions ... 

BLUE 

...91 Billions... 

GREEN 

... 42 Billions.... 

YELLOW 

....76 Billions.... 

ORANGE 

....68 Billions.... 

BED ■ 



J 



I 







....62 Billions 


....86 Billions 


45 Billions 


42 Billions 


....29 Billions 


....48 Billions 



0. 




J 



J 

J 



104 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

In the same ratio as the length of the color wave 
decreases does the number of undulations increase as we 
go up the scale. This holds good in all the different 
octaves on the seven fields of vibratory activity on the 
microcosmic scale of vibrations. 

Radio-activity or luminous emanations from the human 
body is now accepted as a positive fact. These emanations 
proceeding from the human body constitute the aura sur- 
rounding a person and is clearly seen by the clairvoyant to 
be the shape and form of an egg, hence was called by the 
ancient seers the auric egg. In this treatise of the human 
aura we shall principally deal with the aura of a person 
located on F sharp on the musical scale, because on this 
vital center, the messianic point, we find the most perfect 
human being, hence the most perfect aura displaying 
all the rainbow tints in the same order and perfection 
as we see them in the rainbow, but reversed in their posi- 
tion. (See colored plate No. 5.) It will be well to explain 
here the reason why the red color appears on the outside 
and the violet on the inside of the rainbow in the cloud, 
which is not true to nature. When the solar rays strike 
the raindrops at a certain angle the raindrops act as a 
prism with one refraction and one reflection. By this 
reflection the color bands in the rainbow become reversed 
just like we see them reversed in the spectrum; when the 
solar rays strike the raindrops at a different angle there 
are two refractions and two reflections which reverses 
the picture once more; hence the outside rainbow, 
although not so clear because of the two reflections, is 
true to nature, and is the true rainbow — corresponding to 
the teachings of psycho -harmonial philosophy. 



Aura 105 

In the human aura on F sharp a reddish tint colored band 
appears about half an inch from the body, followed next 
in order by the orange tinted band; these two bands of 
color tints we have learned to be lowest in vibratory 
color activity, and are the finer sublimated emanations 
from the physical body; the next two tints being yellow 
and green are the emanations from the spiritual body and 
become the most marvelous field for study, by virtue 
of the fact that here we find reflected the very thoughts, 
character, desire and emotional feelings of the human 
being, sometimes presenting lace-like geometrical fig- 
ures in successive order by which the different character- 
istics of the human being may be readily interpreted. 
These figures have been seen to change instantly to con- 
form with the person's change of thought and emotional 
feelings; an outburst of anger could not be better repre- 
sented in nature than by a volcanic outburst and up- 
heaval or the explosion of a bomb, yet this may actually 
be seen in the human aura. And at other times in dif- 
ferent persons human characteristics may be read in the 
human aura by the display of dominant flashes of tints 
and shades of all descriptions as tabulated here below: 

DOMINANT AURIC DISPLAY 

Hate — Is indicated by sooty blackness lit up from within 

by flashes of scarlet red. 
High Spirituality — Pale lavender. 
Anger — Scarlet, deep red. 
Selfish Affection — Dark red or rust color. 
Pride or Ambition — Deep orange. 
High Intellect — Pale yellow. 



106 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

Strong Intellect — Deep yellow. 

Adaptability — Emerald green. 

Jealousy — Green shot with red. 

Deceit — Olive green. 

Pure Religious Feeling — Deep blue. 

Selfish Religious Feeling — Deep blue with flashes of 

red. 
Religious Feeling Tinged with Fear — Blue color, 

clouded with gray. 
Unselfish Affection — Deep pink. 
Love for Humanity — Pink tinged with violet. 
Devotional Affection — Heliotrope. 
Nobility — Blue gray. 
Fear — Gray. 
Malice — Dark blue. 
Sympathy — Pale greenish gray. 
Selfishness — Dark brownish purple. 
Sensuality — Livid sanguinary red. 
Pure Affection — Bright red. 
Love — Crimson . 

The symbolical color display as given in the above 
table is not declared to be absolute, for inasmuch as it is 
only seen clairvoyantly the very nature of the case makes 
it possible and very probable that all clairvoyants do 
not see these things alike, hence the interpretation of 
color display as given above should first be verified by 
the amateur clairvoyant and perhaps interpretations 
suitable to some individual case may be necessary. 

The next tinted bands come in rainbow order as 
follows : Blue, purple and violet. These are the emana- 
tions from the human soul and can only be seen around 



Aura 107 

persons of highly developed soul powers and most clearly 
when the human being is in a high state of ecstasy — 
when soul powers are brought to a high tension result- 
ing in a great outpouring of soul force. Our language 
today lacks words of expression wherewith to describe 
these gold-rimmed cloud -like tints rising above the head 
and shoulders of such a person in that glorified state. 
It was frequently seen and described by the ancient as 
a halo surrounding a saintly person's head or a Messiah. 
The old Hindu Yogis called it the "Pingali" and said it 
spread from the right side, from the sole of the right foot 
to the top of the head and looked like the sun — a great 
circle of fire — and called it the vehicle of the "Divas." 
The "Ida Nadi" was said to spread out on the left side of 
the body, from the sole of the left foot to the top of the 
head and shone like the moon in brightness and was called 
the breath of the "Pitris." In all other human beings 
not located on F sharp, where imperfect harmonious 
relations exist between the primary factors, Soul, Force 
and Substance, the color tinted bands are presented in 
different disorderly positions with various degrees of 
brightness according to the person's different locations 
from the vital center of F sharp on the scale. The 
nearer their locations approach the two extremities of 
the scale the greater the discord which is displayed in 
the surrounding aura in a conglomerate mass of dis- 
cordant tints, corresponding to their naturally diseased 
conditions of body and mind which, in their ignorance 
and neglect, they do not know how to overcome. In 
this pathetic state of diseased conditions the electrical 
streamers or striations that project at right angle from 



108 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the body, shooting outward through the auric tint colored 
bands in healthy persons, now droop down and appear 
as a tangled irregular mass, but immediately commence 
to straighten out as soon as vital forces are transmitted 
to the patient by a healer, hence by some called health 
lines. 

The old Hindu physicians diagnosed diseased con- 
ditions from the various colored emanations proceed- 
ing from the wrist and finger tips of the patient. By 
using this clairvoyant method they did not have to ask 
the patient for symptoms, but always told the patient 
the attendant symptoms; but they were heathens, you 
know, and are not worthy of a following by a supposed 
higher Western civilization with several long centuries of 
practice and observations of etiological and pathological 
conditions of the human being, hence would know better 
than to diagnose disease from auric conditions which the 
modern physician cannot see or understand how to inter- 
pret. The Orient and Occident are always reversing 
one another's methods, even so in this case. The Hindu 
physician studies his case from cause to effect. The 
Western college bred physician studies his case from 
effect to cause, hence must know the symptoms before 
he can find the cause producing the effect. 

The human aura on F sharp, when the person is highly 
and harmoniously developed, extends outward from two 
feet to two feet and a half from the body. On the other 
hand, when no development has been attained it may not 
extend outward more than one or one and a half feet and 
very indistinctly at that. The colored rays from the finger 
tips we have often seen extend outward for more than two 



Aura 



109 



and a half feet. At certain times we have observed the 
auric tint colored bands to form circles around the body, 
horizontally, with band above band from extreme lower 
point of spine to top of head. This makes a very interest- 
ing display with reference to harmonial relations be- 
tween the several colored bands and the different parts 
of the body, brain and spinal cord they are associated 
with, as illustrated in the following diagram: 

HUMAN AURA ON F SHARP 
FORMING BANDS HORIZONTALLY AROUND THE BODY 



Color 



Brain and Nerve Plexuses 



WHITE CEREBRUM. 



YIOLET CEREBELLUM. 



PURPLE MEDULLA OBLONGATA 



BLUE CERYICAL GANGLIA 



GREEN THORACIC GANGLIA. 



YELLOW LUMBAR GANGLIA . 



ORANGE SACRAL GANGLIA. 



BED COCCYX PLEXUS. 



J 



m 



j 



j 
j 



1 1 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

Here the thoughtful reader cannot fail to notice the 
beautiful harmonial relations presented in nature where- 
ever perfect harmony exists; this condition is often 
called at-one-ment with God, meaning a harmonious 
relation with cosmic laws, where there is no discord, no 
friction, no disease, no pain or suffering, but transcendent 
bliss, health, happiness and joy. This is the state of 
conditions attending a harmoniously developed human 
being located on F sharp, to which the human aura bears 
unimpeachable testimony. But do not understand us to 
mean that these conditions inhere with every one natur- 
ally born on F sharp, for although natural foundation 
exists, the inherent powers and potentialities may not 
have been developed. Hereditary tendencies and en- 
vironments may induce abnormal development, and a 
reversal cannot but be expected, even prenatal parental 
impress must be taken into account; also planetary in- 
fluences at time of conception and birth, which have a 
tendency to modify or intensify F sharp people as well 
as all other people differently located on the musical 
scale, which will be fully explained in the second octave 
of this work. 

Would it not, to a large extent, revolutionize society 
if we all could see one another just as we really are? 
Would not the hypocrite, forger, horsethief , and mur- 
derer vacate his prominence in high places and slip back 
into alley- ways of society where he really belongs? and 
often have to change places with the honest, truly devel- 
oped human soul that covers, perforce of circumstances, 
his body with threadbare garments, which indeed do 
not hinder a beautiful auric display which is an undis- 



Aura 1 1 1 

putable evidence of honor, integrity and all those 
characteristics inherent in a perfectly developed human 
being on F sharp? 

But nature no doubt had a purpose in view when 
she hung a birth veil over the clairvoyant sight and 
obscured all these distinctions and differentiations in 
society. We could not have a musical scale without 
low and high C and all intermediary notes ; we could not 
have a world, systems or constellations without these 
differentiations on the scale of vibration! Unity and 
diversity, harmony and discord, positive and negative, 
primate and ultimate, beginning and ending, seem to 
be the universal law in the various departments of organic 
as well as inorganic nature. 

'Environs with a subtle force, 
From fluids blent within, 
Each aura holding full its power 
To bless its every kind." 

— M. A. Congdon. 

"Back of all, a rainbow riseth, 

Hoop of promise for all time, 
And the magnet of our body 

Was drawn from it line on line. 
In the center of the rainbow 

Music played for Nature's dance; 
Music, rhythm, soft and low, 

Nothing ever came by chance." 

— Wanda. 



CHAPTER VIII 



Chromatic Scale of G 



P 



* 



* 



I 



BE £ F E E 



221 



MESMERISM AND HYPNOTISM 



We have now come to a subject that demands a most 
careful and exact analysis that a true explanation of 
cause and effect may be given to the honest student and 
investigator of mesmeric and hypnotic phenomena,— an 
explanation that will appeal to the reasoning faculty and 
be understood by all intelligent readers. We admit, 
however, that a thorough and comprehensive understand- 
ing of this great subject cannot be realized until the stu- 
dent has carefully studied and become familiar with our 
explanations of all associated subjects throughout this 
work; especially as it involves a clear and true concep- 
tion of the powers and forces operating in the human 
being which have been partly explained in the sixth 
chapter of this octave, and a comprehensive understand- 
ing of the vitalization process taking place in the human 
being which will be fully explained in the seventh chap- 
ter, second octave. In this chapter we shall from the 
standpoint of PSYCHO-HARMONIAI, PHILOSOPHY 

112 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 113 

present a new and original definition of mesmerism and 
hypnotism with a new and original explanation of the 
hypnotic processes taking place between the operator 
and the subject and the various phenomena resulting 
therefrom and their effects upon the human subject. 

We shall endeavor to make clear the processes involved 
in suggestion (so-called) and its relation to the hypnotic 
state. All explanations advanced, or conclusions ar- 
rived at, will be based upon the musical scale, the most 
solid foundation extant. We hold that a theory, if 
properly presented and resting upon a solid foundation 
of well-established facts in nature, will be capable of 
explaining all the facts connected with any psychical or 
physical phenomena including mesmerism, hypnotism, 
and healing. If a theory fails to explain all the facts 
connected with a given phenomenon, such a theory can- 
not be true, although it may be presented in a logical 
manner; hence we reiterate: A true system of philoso- 
phy must rest upon a solid foundation and any theory 
or proposition advanced from such a basis, if properly 
stated, must necessarily explain all facts connected 
with any phenomena, be they of a psychical or physical 
nature. We go still further and say: Such a system of 
philosophy will necessarily be in harmony with all things 
in visible and invisible realms of nature. 

Can any one dream of a more solid foundation than 
the all embracing musical scale, which we have already 
shown to be related to all things in nature, or rather 
nature itself is established upon a musical basis. Con- 
sequently all things in nature, including human beings 
by virtue of their multiple vibratory relation to the thir- 



114 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

teen notes on the chromatic scale, are at all times subject 
to musical laws. We have already shown that the funda- 
mental law of harmony governs in all the different realms 
or departments in nature; that the whole universe hangs, 
so to speak, upon the cosmic law of harmony, which 
really governs all psychical and physical phenomena. 
These propositions cannot be successfully denied or con- 
tradicted. Is not harmony inherent in the musical scale? 
Hence we boldly declare that the most positive proof of 
the truthfulness of an explanation of any phenomena, 
of a psychical or physical nature, exists in the law inherent 
in the base upon which the phenomena rests. It, of 
course, necessarily follows that the explanation must 
rest upon the same basis and consequently must be 
true regardless of what any one may think or believe. 
Simply believing a thing to be true does not necessarily 
make it so. It may possibly be the exact opposite of 
truth, which is falsehood. Truth and falsehood are 
exemplified in the two extremities of the musical scale 
on high and low C, and there are all kinds of degrees of 
truth and falsehood represented by the different degrees 
of vibratory motion in the intermediary notes on the scale 
culminating in primate and ultimate of the two extremi- 
ties — low C the primate, high C the ultimate. These facts 
we cannot get away from, hence we are forced to accept 
the axiom: That there is no truth so great, so positive, 
but that there also is at the same time a speck of false- 
hood connected with it, and that there is no falsehood 
so low and perverted but that there is at the same time 
an infinitesimal degree of truth connected with it. Ap- 
ply this to harmony and discord which constitutes music; 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 115 

apply it to heat and cold which constitutes temperature; 
apply it to light and darkness which makes the blue 
sky ;* apply it to positive and negative forces which con- 
stitute energy; apply it to good and evil which consti- 
tutes morality and immorality; apply it to all things in 
nature and the result will be the same, and because of its 
universality it becomes a universal law and we cannot 
get away from it. 

Let us here give an objective illustration of truth 
and falsehood ; true facts or the reversal thereof. Play a 
beautiful piece of music from some of our great musical 
composers on a Victor phonograph, which being a true 
rendering of recorded melody would be truth. Now let 
the power spring run down, move the sound box to the 
other side of the disk, place the needle point at the end 
of the piece just played, reverse the motion of the disk 



*The blue sky is a phenomenon resulting from a blending of 
refracted and reflected light from below and darkness from above, 
which meet and blend in the outskirts of the earth's atmosphere. 
This same phenomenon is produced in the same way in the famous 
Blue Grotto on the island of Capri in the bay of Naples. This cavern, 
under one of the mountain walls, has a narrow opening at the edge 
of the waters of the bay, which extends into the cavern which is 175 
feet long, 100 feet wide, with ceiling 41 feet high. This entire space 
seems to be lit up with a glowing indescribable blue tint, which is 
most perfect in the morning of a clear day between the hours of nine 
and eleven. At this time when the sun shines at a certain angle over 
the mountain, the light being refracted and reflected by the water in 
the bay finds its way into the cavern and blends with the darkness in 
the cave, producing the same phenomena we observe in the sky. 

Light does not travel through interstellar space, from sun to 
planets, as commonly supposed. The light observed on a planet is 
born in the planet's atmospheric environments when the face of the 
planet is turned toward the sun. For a logical support of this propo- 
sition we submit the following quotations from eminent scholars and 
philosophers. Dr. Rodgers says: "Brilliant and dazzling though the 
sun really appears, its brightness, like its heat, is but seeming. The 
same process which develops sun heat also develops sunlight. It is 
now well known that light diminishes in the direction of the sun, in the 
same ratio as heat diminishes." Captain Abney, of the Royal Society 



1 1 6 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

and you will have a reversed rendering of that music 
from end to beginning which is the opposite of truth — 
truth reversed — and we call it falsehood. Thus in the 
same way truth may be falsely rendered and distorted and 
by such reversal become a falsehood, capable of being 
again reversed and rendered in its original purity and 
beauty. It is simply a juggling with the two opposites, 
the transformation of the ultimate back to the primate 
and the primate into the ultimate. Truth is not and 
cannot be destroyed; it exists in the very midst of the 
lowest falsehood. When listening to the reversed music 
from a phonograph, the ascending and descending pitch 
of the notes also become reversed, yet the same sound is 
there and can be recognized, although false and discord- 
ant. If any one wants more fun along this line of experi- 
mentation, put on a disk bearing the record of a good 



of London, found upon measurement "that at the elevation of simply- 
one and one-half miles the light of the atmosphere was only from one- 
tenth to one-twentieth as great as that at the surface of the earth. 
At a little over three miles the sun appears no brighter than the moon, 
and at four miles the sun's rays are no longer capable of producing the 
rainbow colors of the solar spectrum. The yellow only is seen, and 
that without lines. 

"Brilliancy is not a quality inherent in the sun. Its dazzling 
brilliancy, so far from being located at the sun itself, is actually con- 
fined to the earth's surface." 

Dr. Miner, in his Cosmic Evolution makes these remarks concern- 
ing sunlight: 

"The power that appears upon the earth as sunlight is awakened 
within the earth's atmosphere, and like the power of gravity gives 
back to the sun just as much as it receives. As well might water flow 
up the side of mountains, or stones and rocks be lifted into space as 
the mists of the ocean are lifted, as that the light and heat from the 
sun should be radiated millions of miles across free space to the planets. 

"The sun and planets are vast magnets revolving in a sea of electro- 
magnetic force. The light of the sun is confined to its own sphere of 
radiance. So is the light of the earth evolved at the base of its incum- 
bent atmosphere, where the era vital sun currents and earth currents 
meet under the disturbance of the non-conducting atmosphere." 

According to the latest reports it has been ascertained by scientific 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 1 1 7 

talker and listen to a speech rendered backwards from 
end to beginning and a jargon not even resembling a 
foreign tongue will impinge on your sense of hearing with 
all the horrors imaginable, still the same voice is there 
and can be recognized. * 'Truth starts out as truth, 
from the fountain head of truth, but by the time it gets 
to our imperfect physical sense perception it has become 
more or less distorted, yea, even reversed and thus 
becomes unadulterated falsehood." 

"Errors, like straw upon the surface flow, 
He who would search for pearls must dive below." 

— Dryden. 

The present accepted explanation of hypnotism and 
therewith connected phenomena given out from material- 
istic viewpoints from a reversed or false basis, resting 
on nothing better than assumption and belief with their 
various discordant theories, resembles the jargon coming 



experiments with miniature balloons carrying special self-recording 
instruments, registering altitude and temperature in the upper regions 
of the atmosphere, that there exists* at the height of 46,680 feet above 
the surface of the earth a temperature of 111 degrees below zero, 
Fahrenheit. 

In Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy we teach that the sun is a great 
electro-magnetic dynamo, constantly emanating and projecting in 
space electro-magnetic impulses, which when striking the atmosphere 
of a planet produces light and heat by friction in its passage through 
that planet's atmosphere, hence the degree of light and heat upon any 
of the planets in a solar system depends upon the density of the planet's 
atmosphere and not upon the distance the planet may be located from 
the central sun. This wise provision in nature makes it possible for 
all the planets in a solar system to be inhabitable. As the principle 
of self -replenishment in all radio-active processes is reciprocal, the sun 
receives just as much electro-magnetic force back from space as is 
projected into space, and thus equilibrium and balance is constantly 
maintained in the universe, that is, perfect balance of harmonial force 
relations between the millions of solar systems constituting the uni- 
verccelum. — Author. 



118 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

from a reversed piece of music played on the phono- 
graph. These theories have been formulated to explain 
some of the observed facts; then the attempt is made to 
prove the theory with the facts which may have been 
reversed in the analyzing process. 

The result is obvious when any one undertakes to 
explain psychic processes from a materialistic standpoint. 
The standard of measurement must be adapted to the 
thing to be measured ; silks and ribbons can be measured 
with a bushel measure no more than potatoes can be 
measured with a yardstick. Reverse the standard of 
measurement by giving the bushel to the drygoods mer- 
chant and the yardstick to the groceryman, and we 
would have another jargon similar to the reversed phon- 
ographic experiments. 

We expect to prove that the basis of all hypnotic 
phenomena lies in the dynamic power of the human soul, 
manifested through the will and mind, consequently the 
standard of analysis must be adapted to or capable of ex- 
plaining psychic processes. By this method of analysis we 
are enabled to reason from cause to effect and not from 
effect to supposed cause which so far has eluded the 
grasp of materialistic psychologists, hence no clear ex- 
planation of hypnotic processes has ever been given. 
This has been admitted by one of the directors of a psy- 
chological college in Chicago when he said, "Let it be 
clearly understood that no thoroughly satisfactory expla- 
nation of how hypnotism produces the impression of 
ideas antagonistic to the operator is yet at hand." 

This explanation can never be found as long as psy- 
chological processes are measured by mental philosophy's 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 119 

yardstick. Psychology today is simply mental philoso- 
phy in which mind is mistaken for soul, mind action 
upon the brain mistaken for soul activity through the 
WILL and MIND. Changing the term psychology to 
mindology would be more consistent. To undertake to 
explain psychological processes under a false conception 
of powers and forces operating in the human being, will 
inevitably result in a jargon that cannot be understood. 
For when reversed truth is analyzed it is found to be 
nothing but error and fallacy with a sprinkling of truth. 
We want it to be clearly understood that we have only 
been referring to the psychic processes in hypnotism 
and not to the various methods by which hypnotic 
phenomena may be obtained in a suitable, sensitive sub- 
ject; these being well understood it is not necessary for 
us to deal with that part of the subject, but rather ex- 
plain those processes so long covered with clouds of 
darkness and completely enshrouded in mysticism. 

The hypnotic processes were well understood by the 
ancient Egyptians and practiced by them long before the 
Christian era, if we are to judge from legendary history 
well supported by recently discovered sculptures and 
hieroglyphics in tombs and temple ruins of these ancient 
people, who no doubt had received this knowledge 
from the more ancient races of people in Persia and 
India with whom they had commercial relations. 

We read in A. J. Davis's "Divine Revelation," page 
417, as follows : "And it was at this time (long before Moses) 
that the Egyptians and other Eastern tribes discov- 
ered the power and art of inducing abnormalness by 
various gestures and manipulations. Persons who were 



120 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

very susceptible of being thus influenced were selected 
and brought into the presence of the king's counselors 
who would affect them physically and make them appear 
as if dead, inducing the sleep which they supposed was 
necessary in order that they might have direct intercourse 
with, and receive advice from, the deities, for they could 
not always dream as they chose, and so in order that a 
dream might be had whenever desired they would throw 
these persons into a state corresponding to death and 
receive from their lips while in that state, an indefinite 
expression of a dream which was interpreted by the 
counselors and held to be true and divine." 

And again from page 443 we quote : 

"Joshua was naturally well constituted, both physi- 
cally and spiritually, and his mind was rendered the 
more fertile and susceptible of correct instruction by 
being influenced by the manipulations of Moses." See 
Deut. last chapter, ninth verse. 

And on page 444 the same author says : 

"Joshua, being rendered susceptible to interior im- 
pressions by being subject to abnormalness, could with 
ease and precision prophecy many things. 'And the 
Lord said unto Moses: Take thee Joshua the son of Nun, 
a man in whom is the spirit, and lay thine hand upon 
him ; and thou shalt put some of thine honor upon him 
that all the congregation of the children of Israel may 
be obedient.' Num. xxvii, 18, 20. » 

" 'Baruch, the son of Neriah, wrote from the mouth 
of Jeremiah all the words of the Lord, which he had spoken 
unto him.' " Jer. xxxvi, 4. 

This, no doubt, was another similar case of manipu- 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 121 

lation of a sensitive, who, after the state of abnormalness 
had been induced, spoke while in the unconscious state or 
trance the words that Baruch recorded. 

The knowledge of this and kindred subjects possessed 
only by the high priests of the temple services were 
almost entirely lost during the dark ages until at last 
Dr. Mesmer, of Vienna, rediscovered these lost treas- 
ures so long buried under a cloud of ignorance and 
superstition. 

After many years' practice and experimentation 
Dr. Mesmer at last, in 1775, formulated his discoveries 
into twenty-seven aphroisms which he sent to several 
academies in Europe. These aphroisms contain Dr. 
Mesmer's doctrine clearly and briefly expressed, and it 
is important to become familiar with his teachings as 
many true things are expressed therein. Dr. Mesmer 
advocated what is commonly known as the magnetic 
theory, claiming that by touch a magnetic force was 
transmitted from the operator to the subject, which in 
some way produced the so-called magnetic sleep and 
all the various phenomena which he produced. He also 
found by experimentation that there was a difference 
between animal magnetism and the magnetic force 
emanating from the lodestone, or magnetized metals, 
but he never explained the difference further than to 
say that the former was a curative agent, whereas the 
latter was not. His experimental methods of producing 
the various phenomena has since that time been prac- 
ticed and known by the name of mesmerism. 

Dr. Braid, the eminent English author and close 
observing student of psychic phenomena, formulated a 



122 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

theory some years later, claiming that Dr. Mesmer was 
mistaken in teaching that magnetism was the basis of 
the mesmeric sleep and all other phenomena produced 
by the Mesmeric method; holding that magnetism had 
nothing whatever to do with the phenomena which were 
simply the result of suggestions given by the operator 
when the subject in a passive state was gazing at a bright 
object. He was thus enabled to produce the different 
phenomena without touch or magnetic passes. Dr. 
Braid, thinking he had discovered something new, gave 
it the name of Hypnotism, derived from a Greek word 
meaning sleep, and thus distinguished his system from 
the magnetic theory of Dr. Mesmer; and hypnotism has 
from that time been the commonly accepted term by all 
leading authorities. 

When we come to deal with mesmerism and hypnotism 
as a therapeutic agent in the second octave of this work, 
we shall clearly explain the difference between mesmerism 
and hypnotism and show wherein Dr. Braid and Dr. Mes- 
mer were both wrong and both right, but for the present 
we shall, for the sake of convenience, prefer to use the 
long- established term hypnotism. A little later on Dr. 
Liebeault, of Germany, claimed to have discovered the 
law of suggestion, and in order to have something to 
suggest to that would in some way support the theory 
he advanced, the theory of a subjective and objective 
mind was invented and manufactured to order, supposedly 
to fill the bill of particulars, and is now claimed to be 
the basis of hypnotism. 

We can in no better way show up the inconsist- 
ent, self-contradicting, illogical, unscientific and irra- 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 123 

tional hypothesis of a supposed subjective and objective 
mind than by quoting Mrs. Florence Huntley's clear- 
cut exposition of this false theory, which completely 
overthrows and demolishes this invented theory as a 
working hypothesis which is erroneously held to con- 
stitute the essential basis for present accepted explana- 
tions of hypnotic phenomena, and that all the splendid 
arguments supposed to support the law of suggestion, as 
now explained, are unscientific and without any founda- 
tion to rest on better than assumption and belief, hence 
to a logical, scientific investigator such a supposed law 
becomes no law at all. 

Here follows Mrs. Huntley's uncontrovertible state- 
ments : 

"The examination of the subjective and objective 
mind formula or hypothesis presents among others the 
following curious and most interesting results, viz: 

"On page 30, 'Law of Psychic Phenomena,' it is de- 
clared that 'the objective mind is merely the function 
of the physical brain.' On page 199 we read, 'The 
subjective mind exercises complete control over the 
functions and sensations of the body.' It therefore 
controls the objective mind. 

"The subjective mind of an individual is as amenable 
to the control of his own objective mind as to the objec- 
tive mind of another." Page 31. If the subjective mind is 
constantly amenable to control by suggestion of the objec- 
tive mind, the objective mind, therefore, controls the sub- 
jective mind — that is to say, the subjective mind exercises 
complete control over the objective mind (which is only 
a function of the body) and at the same time is con- 



124 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

stantly amenable to control by suggestion of the ob- 
jective mind. 

"In other words, the subjective mind controls a 
function of the body and is controlled by that function 
at the same time. Reduced to its simplest expression 
this means that the subjective mind constantly controls 
the objective mind and is itself at the same time constantly 
controlled by the objective mind. And so, according 
to this theory the subjective mind controls the objective 
mind and the objective mind controls the subjective 
mind, and there you are. It is now in order to inquire 
which mind is in control. This would strongly suggest 
that the theory is in grave need of repairs. 

"If the objective mind controls the subjective mind, 
and is in turn controlled by the subjective mind, then 
it follows that the objective mind controls itself by 
controlling the subjective mind which controls it. Also, 
if the subjective mind controls the objective mind and 
the objective mind in turn controls the subjective mind, 
then it follows that the subjective mind controls itself 
by controlling the objective mind which controls it. 

"This means that the objective mind controls itself 
and the subjective mind controls itself. This last prop- 
osition seems perfectly reasonable, but if it be true that 
each of these two minds controls itself, how is it possible 
for each to be controlled by the other? On the other 
hand, if each is controlled by the other, how is it possi- 
ble for it to control itself? 

"It is easy to understand how a snake might swal- 
low a frog if the snake was large enough and the frog 
was small enough. It is also possible to understand that 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 125 

a very large frog might swallow a very small snake, 
but human reason pauses at the proposition that a snake 
and a frog may swallow each other at the same time. 
It is possible that a 'working hypothesis' might be con- 
structed which would compel them to do so, but if so, 
such a hypothesis would, in science, be thereby proved 
false. It must, therefore, be clear that such a theory 
as a 'working hypothesis' who delegates to each of the 
two minds complete control of the other, is false. It is, 
therefore, unscientific and without value. 

"It follows that all the arguments concerning the 
subjective and objective mind theory, based upon this 
working hypothesis, are sophistries pure and simple; 
but this is only the beginning, there are many other 
equally absurd and illogical results which follow from 
the sophistries involved in the original 'working hypothe- 
sis' which cannot be covered in this article." 

We cannot see how students and investigators can 
continue to adhere to the subjective and objective mind 
theory with the above logical explanation staring them 
in the face. It is clear enough for a wayfaring man to 
be able to change his course in the right direction, and 
it is hoped that we have now completely demolished and 
entirely done away with the subjective and objective 
mind fallacy, and that our readers will now stand free 
and unbiased, ready to receive and accept our new and 
original true explanation of hypnotic processes and 
therewith connected phenomena resting upon the most 
solid and scientific basis in nature. 

The first thing in order is to have a correct scientific 
yet simple definition of the term hypnotism that will 



126 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

involve no ambiguity that would tend to destroy its 
scientific value. Before introducing our definition it 
becomes necessary to quote a few definitions from 
leading authorities in this country and Europe, that the 
reader may be able to compare and judge their relative 
value and discriminate between the false and the true; 
between the harmonial melody of the masters and the 
discordant and disconnected jargon of fallacy. 

Every student familiar with the literature on this 
subject must be acquainted with the fact that the 
leading authorities are at variance and differ very 
materially upon almost every essential phase of the 
subject. They disagree upon the methods of induc- 
ing the hypnotic state or condition; they have differ- 
ent theories (resting on no foundation) in regard to the 
nature of the forces employed in hypnotic processes. 
They do not agree in reference to the nature of the 
relation existing between the operator and the subject, be- 
fore and during the continuance of the hypnotic processes. 
Divergent, contradictory and in many cases assumed 
statements occur in their various definitions of the sub- 
ject. These inharmonious and contradictory views and 
theories of leading authorities can be interpreted to mean 
nothing but a proof positive that their teachings are 
anything but true, for please remember that an explana- 
tion of processes and resultant phenomena, if true, must 
be in harmony with all things in visible and invisible 
realms of nature. 

A most curious definition advocated by many pro- 
fessional hypnotists and teachers runs something like 
this: "Hypnotism is personal magnetism." "Personal 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 127 

magnetism is suggestion." "Suggestion is hypnotism 
and hypnotism is based upon suggestion." And again: 
"Personal magnetism is [said to be] the art of pleasing." 
Any comment upon the juggling with these terms would 
be relatively ridiculous, hence we shall let the reader ana- 
lyze and figure out these definitions while we present a 
few others. 

A well-known leading professional hypnotist defines 
hypnotism to be, "A conscious or unconscious sugges- 
tion given by one person and accepted in a conscious or 
unconscious state by another." 

In this definition an attempt is made to define the 
method by which the hypnotic state is induced and the 
consequent hypnotic phenomena produced, both sup- 
posed to be the result of suggestion, hence this definition 
does not in any way define what hypnotism really is> 
neither the term nor the processes. An eminent Ger- 
man professor defines hypnotism to be, "A condition in 
which a suggestion has an exaggerated effect." This 
definition deals only with the hypnotic state or condi- 
tion after it has been induced and does not in the least 
define the processes by which this state or condition has 
been induced, hence is only a partial definition; besides, 
a suggestion given after the hypnotic state or condition 
has been induced is never exaggerated but really falls 
short in a degree corresponding to the degree to which 
the hypnotic state has been induced. 

A very popular and eminent professor in psychology 
in a leading university in state, gives the fol- 
lowing definition of hypnotism: 

"Hypnotism is a science based upon the belief [note 



128 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the belief] in two selves to each finite body; the mind 
self and the matter self; the subjective superior self and 
the objective inferior self which is governed by the sub- 
jective self." In commenting upon this definition we 
will refer the reader back to pages 123, 124 and 125 
in this chapter, where the subjective and objective mind 
theory has been proven to be false and thrown aside as 
valueless. To use the term ' 'finite body" would imply 
that there could be such a thing as an infinite body — who 
ever heard of such a thing as an infinite physical body? 
A personal god (personal implies body or form) might 
have a physical body, but how a personal god could be 
an infinite god in a finite physical body is too great a 
strain upon human comprehension, yet we have such 
intimations from a conspicuous modern educator in one 
of the foremost universities in our land. We shall offer 
no comment on his terms "mind self and matter self," 
for that false theory has already been thrown out of 
court and cast into the rubbish pile to perish in company 
with all other false ideas and theories. The very fact 
that he uses the term "belief" will relegate his definition 
to the realm of ambiguity, hence of no value to scientific 
students and investigators. 

Another definition must be noticed, especially as it 
comes from an eminent, leading spiritualist teacher, 
author and M. D., with recognized authority on psychic 
subjects, and should be of great value to students and 
investigators of psychic phenomena resulting from 
hypnotic processes. This venerable and highly respected 
doctor says that "Hypnotism is a temporary sleep of 
various degrees; a mental condition exerted upon a 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 129 

sensitive subject by a conscious operator influencing and 
controlling the voluntary powers." This definition, 
like the preceding ones, deals only with the effect taking 
place in the sensitive subject after the hypnotic state or 
condition has been induced. There is no allusion to the 
processes by which such "a mental state or condition has 
been exerted upon the sensitive subject." The subject's 
WILL power is never at any time controlled by the con- 
scious operator. 

An unknown, yet important and conspicuous, author 
defines hypnotism as follows: 

"The process by and through which a hypnotist 
holds and exercises control of the will, voluntary powers 
and sensory organism of his subject." This definition 
mentions the process by and through which control is 
brought about and exercised during the continuance of 
said process; but whatever that process is or ought to 
be, is to the student investigator still a profound mystery 
and left for him to unravel as best he can. We will here 
most emphatically enter our unqualified denial of the 
supposed control of the sensitive subject's will by the 
operating hypnotist. To maintain, hold, assert and 
assume that the will of a sensitive subject is controlled 
by the operating hypnotist does not in fact make it so 
even if the arguments in its favor should be seemingly 
logical and convincing. A positive proof resting upon 
the fundamental law which governs hypnotic processes 
and hypnotic control must be given in order to enforce 
scientific value. This very essential point in hypnotism 
will be fully explained in this work and we kindly ask our 
thoughtful readers to suspend judgment until all the 
9 



130 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

facts in the case have been presented and explained, all 
resting upon the most solid basis — nature. Then are 
we willing to rest the case for final judgment before the 
court of intelligent and unbiased student readers. 

In Foster's Encyclopedic Medical Dictionary we find 
the following definition of hypnotism: "An abnormal 
state into which some persons may be thrown by the 
exercise of another person's will; characterized by the 
suspension of the will and consequent obedience to the 
prompting of suggestions from without." In this defini- 
tion "a suspension of the subject's will" is claimed "to 
produce consequent obedience to suggestions given by 
the operator or some one else," but mark well the author 
does not say that the operator has "suspended the sub- 
ject's will." For, indeed, there is no call or necessity of 
the operator suspending or controlling the sensitive 
subject's will; for does not the subject willingly and 
according to agreement entered into before the hypnotic 
processes were commenced, suspend or hold in abeyance 
his own will and voluntary powers, which when lying 
dormant, as it were, in passivity, constitute the requisite 
conditions for inducing the hypnotic state! 

If we should ask a certain person to do something for 
us, and he is willing and agrees to do it and does do it, will 
any sane man say it is necessary for us to compel him 
to do a thing that he has already done? To deny this 
would be as absurd as to hold that a hypnotist by sug- 
gestion controls the will and voluntary powers of his 
subject. As a general rule, the hypnotic processes cannot 
be forced to the point where hypnotic phenomena be- 
come possible unless the sensitive subject is willing and 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 131 

fulfills his part of the contract, which is to enter no 
protest or in any way interfere with the processes, but 
lay still with his own will in passivity that the operator 
may (if the nesessary harmonious relation exists) switch 
in between the subject's will and mind and by virtue of 
the blending process become the controlling factor and 
direct the mind activity upon the brain and thus con- 
trol the sensory organism and all functional activities, 
mental and physical. 

This is a provisional law in nature and holds good, 
as a rule, with only a few exceptions, where prior condi- 
tions exist that will enable the hypnotist to induce the 
hypnotic state in a subject entirely unconscious of such 
an attempt being made. Some teachers of hypnotism 
claim to have discovered a method by which they often 
succeed in hypnotizing a great many people against 
their will who have never been operated on before. This 
may be true in some cases already referred to and in 
other cases hypnosis may be induced in a lower degree, 
yet a great deal of allowance must be made in favor of 
the interested party making such statement. 

In the face of all these controversies and different 
opinions we shall boldly proclaim our new and original 
definition of hypnotism and explain the processes lead- 
ing up to the production of hypnotic phenomena. These 
explanations will be based upon the musical scale, in 
which is inherent the great fundamental law of harmony 
on which the whole universe hangs. The law of cosmic 
harmony governs all nature, hence nature is most cer- 
tainly established upon a musical basis, and it follows 
that the hypnotist and his subject must become, and at 



132 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

all times are, subject to musical laws. Harmony is the 
law that governs all hypnotic processes taking place 
reciprocally between the operating hypnotist and the 
sensitive subject. If any of our readers should not at 
once understand our definition, please do not therefore 
get discouraged and fall into erroneous conclusions and 
condemn what has not been understood. Pray do not 
kick us for giving these truths to the world, but direct 
your kick at nature upon which they are based ; go after 
the whole universe and shake its very foundation before 
you undertake to destroy our foundation — the musical 
scale. This language, we dare say, is plain enough. 

DEFINITION OF HYPNOTISM 
From the standpoint of Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy. 

i. HYPNOTISM IS A SCIENCE DEALING 
WITH PHENOMENA TAKING PLACE IN HYP- 
NOSIS. 

2. HYPNOSIS IS A STATE OR CONDITION 
INDUCED UNDER PASSIVITY. 

3. THE HYPNOTIC STATE IS A RESULT OF 
A BLENDING OF THE VITAL ELECTRO-MAG- 
NETIC FORCES OF TWO INDIVIDUALS RE- 
SULTING IN HOMOCENTRIC POLARIZATION 
IN THE NEGATIVE. 

4. THIS MEANS A TEMPORARY BLENDING 
OF HARMONIOUSLY RELATED PRIMARY 
FORCES AND ELEMENTS OF TWO INDIVIDUALS. 

In the preceding chapters we have clearly shown how 
systems of worlds came into existence by the blending 
of HARMONIOUS RELATED PRIMARY FORCES 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 133 

and ELEMENTS. We have shown how life-motion 
originated in the harmonious blending of SOUL, FORCE 
and SUBSTANCE, resulting in the triune combination 
of soul, spirit and body. We have traced this triune 
combination along evolutionary lines of expansive and 
progressive unfoldments, from the base to the apex of 
the physical pyramid of forms, where we find the human 
being as the ultimate, the high C on this the physical 
octave on the scale of being, with god-like attributes 
and potentialities with which we are now dealing. We 
have found that the same cosmic law of harmony gov- 
erns in every realm and in every department of nature 
and that all phenomena, psychical or physical, result 
from a blending of harmoniously related PRIMARY 
FORCES and ELEMENTS. These statements cannot 
be successfully contradicted or denied because they are 
self-evident facts and will forever stand forth as beacon 
lights, guiding the honest truth seekers over the breakers 
of error and fallacy into the placid waters in the harbor 
of truth. 

We now consider that we are in a position to give a 
true explanation of hypnotism and the therewith con- 
nected phenomena in accord with the definition already 
given. And it is hoped that the reader is fully prepared 
to receive and comprehend the ideas we are attempting 
to convey. The hypnotic phenomena have been de- 
clared to result from a blending of the vital electro- 
magnetic forces of two individuals — the hypnotist and 
the subject. This blending process can only take place 
when a harmonious relation exists in the vibratory 
motion of the vital electro-magnetic forces of the hypno- 



134 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

tist and the subject. This blending always takes place 
in a degree corresponding to the degree of harmonious 
relation existing between the two participants. Under 
this law a blending process of the forces emanating from 
two individuals may take place without any hypnotic 
phenomena resulting therefrom. 

In psycho-harmonial philosophy we divide the hyp- 
notic process in too degrees; the blending process in 
nature varies from one degree or per cent to 50 per cent, 
where the process always stops simply because nature's 
object has been obtained — balance, equilibrium or homo- 
centric polarity. 

It is the blending of the electric and magnetic forces 
in nature which results in the phenomena called gravity 
and levity, which with an iron grasp hold the planets 
in their respective orbits around their central sun. This 
same principle of blending is in evidence when a positive 
and negative planet pass one another in their merry 
dance around the sun ; if the relation between the two plan- 
ets is harmonious, the blending process becomes manifest 
in increased speed of the negative planet until they meet 
on the line of conjunction. This is called the law of 
attraction; at that point the blending process under 
favorable conditions may attain the 50 per cent point 
and stops the moment equilibrium and balance is ob- 
tained. As the planet passes the line of conjunction a 
reaction follows with corresponding ratio of decreased 
speed until former normal conditions are restored. In 
astronomy this is called perturbation of a planet. It 
was the perturbation of the planet Uranus at a certain 
point in its orbit that led to the location and final dis- 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 135 

co very of the planet Neptune swinging in its orbit out- 
side of Uranus, which was greatly agitated like the needle 
of the compass whenever she was passing by Neptune. 
Neptune being a magnetic planet located on G sharp on 
the scale, Uranus as an electric planet on F (see plate No. 
10, Second Octave) we find them playing in the key of C 
sharp with F and G sharp as a major chord, hence the 
harmonious relation in this chord facilitated the blend- 
ing process of the electric and magnetic forces of the two 
planets, exhibiting attraction and agitation noticed by 
astronomers whenever they pass one another in their 
orbits. 

We have often demonstrated the operation of this 
law with two sheets of tissue paper, 6x12 inches, in this 
way: We commence the experiment with one piece of 
paper in a normal negative state on low C; we then rub 
the other paper with our right hand until magnetic 
vibrations are increased to correspond with or have a 
multiple relation to E on the scale, when the tissue 
papers will fly together if brought within a few inches of 
one another and stick together until the forces have by 
the blending process become equalized and perfect equi- 
librium established between the two in which they be- 
come as one in polarity, then they separate. Now we 
take either one of the papers, now polarized on D, and 
increase its vibrations to correspond to F sharp and the 
same result will be obtained, and as long as they are 
kept on the one, three, five points forming major chords 
going up or down the scale, the same results will follow, 
but whenever we get them in multiple relation to dis- 
cordant notes on the scale, we have the opposite result, — 



136 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the papers fly apart and cannot be forced together, be- 
cause no blending process can take place under discord- 
ant, repulsive relations. This is gravity and levity 
exemplified on a small scale. This experiment can be 
worked best on a clear, cold winter day. It may now be 
clearly seen that the hypnotic blending process of the 
vital electro-magnetic forces of two individuals under 
harmonial relations existing between the positive and 
negative may take place in degrees varying from i per 
cent to 50 per cent long before any attempt has been made 
to produce hypnotic phenomena of any character, pro- 
vided, however, the two parties are near one another, in 
the same room for instance, yet without actually touch- 
ing one another. This certainly explains Dr. Braid's 
method of producing the hypnotic state without actual 
contact with his subject, which he thought to be a result 
of his suggestions given to the subject when gazing at a 
bright object. The real fact is that the subject was very 
sensitive, which under harmonial relations present made 
him very susceptible to the blending process which com- 
menced the moment the subject entered the room, and 
in the presence of the Doctor quickly increased and 
reached the 50 per cent point when gazing at a bright 
object, which helped to instill the negative state and hold 
the subject's attention when under passivity the blending 
process was augmented and rapidly forced up to the 65 
per cent point by the Doctor's desire, manifested through 
his will, to obtain the phenomenon sought for, conse- 
quently when the suggestion of sleep was given it was 
at once manifested in the subject. 

Now it may be clearly seen that the processes in Dr. 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 137 

Braid's and Dr. Mesmer's systems are identically the 
same, although the methods by which the results were 
obtained are different. The suggestion did not produce 
the hypnotic state (for that already existed) ; suggestion 
only transferred into objective reality the desire of the 
operator that it might be observed by sense perception. 
Although the mesmeric and hypnotic processes are 
virtually the same under various different methods, the 
mesmerist and hypnotist are of very different tempera- 
ments, which results from the relation the electric and 
magnetic forces in their systems hold to each other, which 
again results in a perfect or defective vitalization process. 
All these differentiations give them their respective 
locations on the musical scale. The hypnotist on or 
between low C and C sharp and on or between B and high 
C, and the mesmerist on or between F, F sharp and G. 
These are positive facts and can by the very nature of 
the case not be otherwise, but the reader must under- 
stand that we mean a natural born hypnotist and a 
natural born mesmerist in the same sense as you speak 
of a natural born statesman, a natural born musician, artist 
or poet. These are the ones that attain greater per- 
fection in their field of endeavor, all other things being 
equal. 

In the second octave of this work we shall clearly and 
fully explain the beautiful and wonderful vitalization 
process taking place in the human being in the posterior 
brain and in all the large nerve centers along the spinal 
cord where electric and magnetic forces (electrons and 
ions) under harmonious relations blend in conjunction 
With soul emanations and by virtue of this triune com- 



138 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

bination in the least form become as one in polarity — 
homocentric — and constitute vitality or so-called nerve 
energy. 

In psycho-harmonial philosophy we call this force com- 
bination VITAL, ELECTRO-MAGNETIC or VITAL MO- 
TIVE ENERGY, which is the motive power of all human 
activities of bodily, as well as mental, functions, governed 
by the soul through the will and mind action upon the 
brain. A human being with highly developed soul 
powers has at all times perfect control of these forces. 
We have frequently demonstrated that we can project 
these vital electro-magnetic forces to any distance 
(1500 miles being the longest distance we ever experi- 
mented with), that we can start and stop their action 
instantly and control them in the same way as a span of 
horses are controlled by the lines in the hands of a good 
driver. 

It is in, by and through a proper control of these forces 
that we live, move and have perfect being along lines 
of least resistance and harmony, or abnormal conditions 
along lines of friction and discord. It is to be thoroughly 
understood that the human soul in its realm of consciousness 
controls all mental as well as bodily functions, in fact, 
all the various activities in the human system, through 
the will and mind, which should be looked upon only as 
avenues of expression and impression. Involuntary ac- 
tions are functional activities along lines of least resist- 
ance which by constant repetition has to a large extent 
become automatic, yet indirectly governed by the soul, 
just like the engine that works automatically is looked 
after and its needs supplied by the engineer. If the en- 



'Mesmerism and Hypnotism 139 

gineer was not superintending and carefully watching the 
automatic engine, how long would it run automatically? 

With the present understanding of this subject it 
will be easy for the thoughtful reader to realize the 
possibility of another soul-entity in the form of a visible 
or|invisible hypnotist switching in between the will and 
mind when the subject's will is withdrawn and lies dor- 
mant in passivity (non-interference) as per agreement, 
and make use of this avenue of expression through the 
subject's brain and initiate and control all functional 
activities; in the same way as the subject himself does 
by and through his will and mind through the instru- 
mentality of the brain, initiate and control directly and 
indirectly all functional activities, mental as well as 
physical. 

In connection with the above the student reader 
should clearly remember that the control of the sub- 
ject's avenues of expression and impression becomes 
possible by virtue of the blending of the vital electro- 
magnetic forces, which when forced by the dynamic 
power of the soul (hypnotist) up to the 60 per cent or 
70 per cent point, the hypnotist is from 10 per cent to 
20 per cent in the majority, and to that degree has control 
and dominant power over his subject. It must also be 
remembered that by virtue of the vitalization process 
the vital electro-magnetic forces of the hypnotist are 
really himself, which, when under harmonious relations, 
blends with the subject's forces and the two become as 
one in homocentric polarity — for the time being. Jesus 
alluded to this blending process when he said, "The 
Father is in me, I in you and you in me." 



140 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

It is well to state here that this blending process is 
reciprocal. Whatever the operator gives out and trans- 
mits must be replaced by the subject, and if the subject 
like the lion knew his power he could turn the table on 
the operator, providing necessary conditions were re- 
versed. This should be well understood, that the opera- 
tor may intelligently provide for return of the current 
just as well as the engineer of an electric plant provides 
for this by a return wire or in some cases by a ground 
wire. 

If we are now fully understood, no one need be per- 
plexed over the fact that a hypnotist can, if he so desires, 
express his very ideas, thoughts and feelings through the 
mind and brain of his sensitive subject, while the subject 
may be in a perfectly conscious state, and in many cases 
not even know that the hypnotic process is going on. If 
at any time at this stage of the proceeding the subject 
should flash out from behind the scene of passivity, the 
relation between the two participants changes like a 
flash of lightning; at the 55 per cent point these rela- 
tions may see-saw and constantly switch back and forth 
according to the subject's power of controlling his own 
WILL- in passivity, and not in any way interfere with 
his own voluntary powers. It is for this reason that a 
person with a well-trained WIIX and MIND can be 
easier handled than a person not so trained. 

This switching back and forth, in and out from the 
corner of passivity, explains the reason why a spirit 
medium at times mixes her own ideas in the message 
communicated by a spirit operator. "They speak a 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 141 

vision of their own heart, and not out of the mouth of 
the Lord." Jer. xxiii, 16. 

Inspiration is simply the instilling of one person's 
ideas into another person's mind under hypnotic processes 
of various degrees that seldom go above the 55 per cent 
point, hence it is almost impossible for an inspired per- 
son to at all times know whether a new idea, that has 
found expression in thought or word, is strictly original 
with himself or herself, or has been implanted in the 
mind by an outside soul-entity. It requires much prac- 
tice and close observation to be able to, at all times, 
distinguish the difference. Hence so many messages 
claimed to be spirit communications simply originate 
with the mediums themselves. The reader will now 
understand that the hypnotic process, all the way from 
1 per cent to the 50 per cent, is met with in the various 
avocations of everyday life when conditions happen to 
be favorable and contact with our fellow beings in one 
way or another is sufficient to facilitate the blending 
process. This being a natural process always stops 
when the 50 per cent point of equilibrium is reached, 
except in cases where a great desire exists with the posi- 
tive party to accomplish certain objects in view, and a 
great degree of sensitiveness exists with the negative 
person, then the blending processes may unconsciously 
be forced up to or above the 75 per cent point. Such 
cases may be witnessed in religious revivals, courtships 
and other similar proceedings, and in lesser degrees with 
the auctioneer, the street corner medicine vender, and 
salesman behind the counter, etc. 

Whenever a discordant relationship exists between 



142 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the vital, electro-magnetic forces of two individuals 
who meet and come in contact by handshaking or other- 
wise, a strange repulsive feeling is at once felt by the 
sensitive, often expressed by saying, "I don't like that 
person." "He is so distant." "I just hate the sight of 
so and so." "I can't bear his or her presence," etc. The 
different degree of such feelings vary according to the 
degree of discordant relationship existing between the 
two. On the other hand when a harmonious relation 
exists between two individuals the blending of the vital 
electro-magnetic forces calls forth the expression of 
pleasure and a feeling of attraction like these: "I fell in 
love with so and so at first sight." "I feel in the presence 
of that person like I had always known him or her," or 
"I feel like that person is a true friend," etc. These 
feelings are intensified or modified according to the de- 
gree of harmonious relation existing, which determines 
the degree of blending of the vital forces, which, by virtue 
and nature of the vitalization process, involves the blend- 
ing of two individualities in degree corresponding to a 
perfect or defective vitalization process in one or both 
of said parties. This topic would require volumes 
wherein to elucidate all the salient points. Hence we 
must go back to the main subject in hand. 

Let us give another proof of this blending process in 
hypnotism. It is a well-known fact with all observing 
students that if hypnotic processes are continued for a 
length of time the sensitive subject will partake of the 
nature and characteristics of the hypnotist who in turn 
will partake of characteristics belonging to the subject. 
For, remember, this blending is reciprocal and explains 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 143 

why and how the operator in suggestive therapeutics 
takes on symptoms of disease from the patient. This 
blending process has been known to change even the 
appearance of the physical organism. 

A case is on record where two telegraph operators 
being for 10 years daily and hourly connected by the 
electric wires and instruments which facilitated the 
blending process, — under pre-existing harmonious rela- 
tions — to such an extent that they became physically, 
mentally and morally just alike — just like twins. Similar 
results in more or less degree are often experienced in 
marital relations, especially when founded upon true 
love of a divine nature. 

This accounts for the well-known fact that a spirit 
medium under long years of mediumistic control, changes 
for the better or the worse, according to the moral 
status of the guides acting as operators, producing phe- 
nomenon under hypnotic influence. Morality is not a 
necessary condition for this blending process, whether 
on a spiritual or physical stage of action, yet we 
admit the axioms, "Birds of a feather flock together,' * 
and "Like attracts like." These are conditions fav- 
orable for opportunities which more readily permit 
the blending process, but physical and psychological 
laws do not suspend their action in favor of morality. 
Two individuals, whether in spiritual or physical bodies, 
may be harmoniously located on the scale of vibration, 
on different octaves on widely separated planes of thought 
and action, hence do not commingle or associate to- 
gether; consequently the opportunity for the blending 
process is to a great extent abridged. But experience 



144 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

has taught us that a spirit being, understanding the laws 
that govern hypnotic control, often takes advantage of 
harmonious relations existing between a higher and 
lower octave, and if opportunity permits starts the 
blending process for selfish or mischievous motives, which 
if permitted to go on is very soon forced up to the 70 per 
cent or 75 per cent point with much unpleasant results 
to the sensitive, although the sensitive subject may be of 
highly moral or virtuous character. This blending of 
two opposites of perhaps two moral extremeties cannot 
but result in the lowering of the higher qualities to the 
benefit of the lower; hence it may be seen that even in 
this so-called "obsession" a good or bad motive may be 
the dominant factor; but in all cases such blending pro- 
cesses should never be allowed to go beyond the 75 per 
cent point, for if it does, the sensitive subject will find it 
impossible to at will cast off this influence, and help from 
outside source becomes necessary to establish tem- 
porarily a new homocentric blending on another chord. 
An exemplification of the blending process involv- 
ing the interchange of two natures, desires and appetites, 
may be experimented with by any one in this way: Let 
the positive party unknown to the sensitive negative 
party drink one or two glasses of beer, then let the posi- 
tive party place his hand on the hand of the sensitive 
subject who will at once taste and feel the same satis- 
faction as if he had drank the beer himself (the two 
parties in this experiment should both like the taste of 
beer). This explains the selfish motive in obsession 
where a selfish spirit operator may by and through this 
blending process on or about the 60 per cent point satisfy 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 145 

his own debased appetites through the instrumentality 
of another physical being, the two being on the same 
plane of desire, thought and action, hence no good could 
possibly come from such an obsession. Let us relate an 
instance where a clairvoyant friend daily gratified an 
invisible friend by smoking 20 or more cigars. In earth 
life they had often smoked together for the sake of enjoy- 
ment and pastime. When we were called upon to break 
up the habit of these two individuals, the invisible party 
soon left, and for some reason or another spiked the 
clairvoyant gun and our sensitive friend became psy- 
chically as blind as a bat and could see no more beauti- 
ful visions because the suggester of these visions had 
departed. In this case the invisible party was willing 
and even desired the breaking up of the blending because 
it was undermining the health of the sensitive subject, 
hence a new homocentric blending for relief was easily 
effected. 

It has been claimed by an unknown author, writing 
authoritatively upon this subject, "That the sensory 
organism of a hypnotic subject is completely paralyzed 
by the hypnotic process, and remains so as long as the 
process is continued." It will be easy enough to con- 
vince a thoughtful reader, and the unbiased investigator, 
that such a proposition is absolutely false; that such an 
erroneous conclusion was arrived at by studying the 
phenomena from a false basis, and a false conception of 
the human being. And we shall endeavor to show that 
the true facts are exactly the opposite, that in place of 
paralyzed sensory nerve centers such centers, and in 
fact the whole nerve system, exhibits greater activity in 
10 



146 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the hypnotic state than otherwise, except when the 
operator by suggestion to a more or less degree stops 
such activity. If the sensory nerve system is paralyzed, 
which is supposed to be the cause of the subject's inability 
to use his five physical senses, it follows that when the 
subject cannot use his muscular system that the motor 
nerve system with its centers must also be paralyzed — 
would it not be funny to see a paralyzed hypnotic sub- 
ject fighting a lot of imaginary bumblebees nestling in 
his hair? Or a somnambulist in a paralyzed condition 
climb over most dangerous places on a high, steep roof 
of a house? — a somnambulist is simply a sensitive sub- 
ject under hypnotic influences from an invisible operator. 

If the brain and all other nerve centers were, as is 
claimed, completely paralyzed, how could it be possible 
for the subject to carry out all the different suggestions 
as given by the operator? Such a proposition is as 
foolish as to expect a bird to fly after both its wings have 
been clipped. All the way from the 50 per cent to the 
70 per cent point the sensitive subject is conscious of 
all things taking place, and every suggestion or rather 
command given by the operator is carried into effect by 
the operator himself, using the mind and the (not para- 
lyzed) nervous system just as the subject would do under 
ordinary conditions. And it really is a puzzle to the 
subject that he has performed acts that he would not 
and could not perform under ordinary conditions. 

We have heretofore explained how the operator 
gains and holds control of the subject's mind, and as 
the function of the mind is to receive all impressions 
coming from the surrounding environments, through 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 147 

the five physical senses, which are transmitted by the 
sensory nerve system to its respective nerve center 
in the brain, where the mind receives these cipher 
messages, interprets and transmits them to the realm 
of consciousness where the human soul then knows that 
the hand is holding a hot or cold object; that a 
pleasant or unpleasant odor comes from another object ; 
that some foods taste sweet, others sour; that two 
or more sounds are harmonious while others are 
discordant; that one object is red, another is blue, etc. 
The human mind, then, is the great avenue, not only 
of impression but also of expression, governed directly 
and indirectly through the voluntary powers. Now, 
let a sensitive subject for the sake of experimentation 
withdraw or hold in abeyance his will power and lie still 
in passivity that another being may, by virtue of the 
blending process, come in control of this great avenue 
of impressions, and thus have a censorship over all 
messages, passing along this highway of knowledge. How 
easy it is under such complete control to intercept and 
stop all messages except his own which he sends to the 
consciousness through the auditory nerve system, which 
are accepted by the mind as true without reasoning, 
because the reasoning faculties only act under the spur 
of the will. The message sent to the subject's conscious- 
ness may be false, yet the mind under control accepts 
it as true — it could not be otherwise, for it would be 
absurd for an operator to allow a subject's mind under 
control to reject a suggestion which was intended to be 
accepted, hence the subject will hear, see, taste, smell, 
and feel only those things the operator has suggested 



148 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

and allowed the mind to transmit to the realm of con- 
sciousness. All other vibratory messages flashed upon 
the various sensory nerve centers in the brain stop there 
and go no farther, as the mind under control of the 
hypnotist refuses to receive and transmit them. 

An analogous process is witnessed when cutting an 
electric telegraph wire, which stops all messages at the 
point where the wire is cut by reason of no further 
medium for transmission, the electrical activities at that 
point are stopped by reason of disconnection. Again, 
suppose a telegraph operator should refuse to receive 
and transcribe messages coming on wires connected with 
his office, his superior officers would not know anything 
about the messages continually clicking in the tele- 
graphic instrument. The telegraph operator is the great 
avenue or highway through which is received telegraphic 
electrical impulses from all parts of the world, and by 
him transcribed into legitimate news of the day. 

We have often demonstrated the human telegraph 
system by sending messages from one station to another 
that we have established in different parts of the system; 
for instance, at the tip of a finger or end of a toe or a point 
on the knee, or on the end of the nose, and calling these 
stations by numbers, we can ring up any one we may 
desire when the proper switching and connection is 
made by the telephone girl — the human mind — on the 
switchboard — medulla oblongata. 

Yet another point or hypnotic phenomenon must 
be explained, especially as it has long been a bone of 
contention and caused much controversy. It has been 
found by experimentation that a hypnotized subject, 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 149 

even at the 90 per cent point of the blending process, will 
steadfastly refuse to commit murder when suggestion 
to do so is given by the controlling hypnotist. The 
subject will stealthily approach his supposed enemy with 
uplifted hand clutching the knife ready to strike the 
fatal blow, but stops right there. Why does he stop at 
this critical point of action? Many leading authorities 
have offered this explanation, "That the operator can- 
not override the moral status of the hypnotized subject; 
that he cannot be made to do things contrary to his 
moral concepts; that a moral subject cannot be made 
to commit an immoral act when hypnotized.' ' 

This explanation may look all right upon its surface, 
but the experimental proof is lacking, and cannot possi- 
bly be obtained, for the hypnotist, giving the suggestion 
to his subject to kill, does not and cannot really mean 
that his subject shall kill the supposed enemy; and the 
subject goes just as far as the operator really intended 
he should go, and stops just where the operator silently 
intended he should stop. It has been truly said "that the 
subject is impelled by the real impulse in the soul of the 
hypnotist and not by the spoken words of command." 

A true explanation of such experiment involves not 
the subject as much as it does the operator. We have 
already explained how the operator by virtue of the 
blending process acts through the subject, even at a 
lower degree of blending, where the two become as one 
in homocentric polarity. How much more, even with- 
out any oral suggestion, would the operator at the 90 
per cent point be able to act out his own desires under 
such overwhelming majority in the blending process? 



iSO Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

Let the operator with such odds in his favor be a mur- 
derer at heart, fostered by that criminal impulse which 
inspires murder, give a suggestion that comes from the 
depth of the soul, burning with an intense desire for 
murder, the hypnotized subject will unhesitatingly com- 
mit the act even if the victim should be a dear personal 
friend. 

There are numerous cases on record which positively 
proves the above statements to be true. A case in New 
York State may be cited in which the hypnotized subject 
actually committed murder without being commanded 
to do so by the hypnotist, who had such a deep hatred 
for this party that he felt like he could and would murder 
him, which he did do through his hypnotized subject, 
who was arrested, tried and convicted of murder and sub- 
sequently went insane in the prison. The hypnotist 
finally made a confession in which he stated that he was 
the guilty party and after having restored his subject to 
normal condition committed suicide. We have actually 
seen lesser crimes committed when the blending process 
between the operator and subject had not even passed 
the 60 per cent point and the subject was unconscious of 
being under hypnotic influence, neither did the criminal 
operator know that hypnotic influences were the principal 
means by which suggestion of crime were so readily carried 
into effect by the sensitive associate; in such a case 
the ignorant positive party becomes an accessory before 
the fact of felony by advising and commanding the 
sensitive subject to commit the crime. 

The real fact is that the positive party, although 
ignorant of hypnotic processes, indirectly committed the 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 151 

crime through his sensitive associate and should be ad- 
judged the most guilty of the two. Kleptomania is an- 
other example of such cases, most generally the result 
of an invisible hypnotist (when not hereditary) ; but how 
do judges and jurors of our law courts handle such cases? 
Does not the innocent generally suffer in place of the 
really guilty one? Yes, no doubt in many cases this is 
true by reason of the fact that under the present accepted 
theory of hypnotism the judges and jurors of our courts 
have no way of discriminating between the innocent and 
the really guilty party, — no way by which they may 
positively know that hypnotic processes had been the 
principal means under which the crime had been com- 
mitted — no scientific means of distinguishing the hypno- 
tist from the subject. 

When judges and jurors become thoroughly familiar 
with the teachings of psycho-harmonial philosophy they 
may scientifically locate the two parties on the musical 
scale and thus absolutely ascertain if hypnotic processes 
could be possible between the two parties. Remember, 
we have conclusively shown that where no harmonious 
relation exists there can be no blending and where there 
is no blending there can be no hypnotic process. They 
could also very accurately ascertain the exact degree of 
sensitiveness of the negative party, which is one of the 
essential factors in the hypnotic process, and thus be able 
to know without a shadow of doubt the real facts in the 
case, and render judgment according to facts and evi- 
dences. 

We cannot here enumerate and explain all the differ- 
ent phenomena produced under hypnotic control, and, 



152 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

in fact, it is not necessary, for inasmuch as they are all 
governed by the same law and the explanations given 
rest upon the same law, the explanation of one phe- 
nomenon must necessarily explain all of them and the 
positive proof of the truthfulness of these explanations 
exists in the same law, which is inherent in the base upon 
which the phenomena rests, hence these explanations 
must be true. 

Self-hypnotism is another phase of this subject 
which demands our attention because of the general 
exceptance of this false doctrine. The term, no doubt, 
is intended to imply that a person can hypnotize 
himself; which is a proposition as false as the basis upon 
which it rests (the subjective and objective mind theory). 
That such an untenable and unscientific hypothesis 
could find credence and support from scientific investiga- 
tors along these lines in this enlightened age, is more than 
we can comprehend. Hypnosis is a result of natural 
processes in which two individuals are involved — the 
operator and his subject — and consequently self -hypnosis 
is unthinkable and absurd on the very face of it. Whenever 
we start in with a false theory it always requires another 
equally false theory to support the first one, and a 
third one to bolster up the second, and so on until we 
have a string of moonshine leading right into a fog bank 
of fallacy and error completely engulfing the credulous 
investigator in darkness and despair. Self-hypnotism 
is the offspring of the subjective and objective mind 
theory, and auto-suggestion is the legitimate child of 
self -hypnotism and upon its shoulder is cast the burden 
of proof as to whether its grandparents did really 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 153 

exist. But as we have conclusively proven that the 
grandparents were only a myth, a fiction pure and 
simple, without any foundation whatever for their exist- 
ence, their descendants — self -hypnotism and auto-sugges- 
tion — do not exist except as lexicographical libels. 

Hypnotism in courtship and marital relations is of 
such vital importance that we really feel it would be a 
neglect of duty if we should dismiss this subject without 
giving it at least some consideration accompanied with 
much needed information and advice. 

We have all the way through this chapter shown that 
harmony is the law that governs the hypnotic and mes- 
meric processes, and when two individuals are located 
practically on the same note on the musical scale, or on 
any of the notes forming major and minor chords, their 
VITAL ELECTRO-MAGNETIC forces vibrate in har- 
mony, and by reason of this harmonious relation under 
favorable conditions blend and become as one in polarity. 
The two individuals actually become homocentrically 
polarized, which when the two individuals are of opposite 
sex is termed true love or soul affinity. This in its ex- 
tended meaning means that two individual soul-entities 
with subordinate factors and faculties in their respective 
triune combination of being, with positive and negative 
principles of opposite sex, vibrate in perfect unison, and 
become polarized in homocentric blending. 

"Two souls with but a single thought, 
Two hearts that beat as one." 

Under such favorable conditions the blending process 
is most perfect, and should never under any circum- 



154 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

stances by selfish or sensual desires be forced above the 
50 per cent point. Equilibrium, balance, equality, affin- 
ity, sympathy, accord and harmony are all relative terms 
and their relative conditions differ only in degree and 
love is a corresponding result. 

In PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY we never 
ignore this equality by using the illogical terms, "My 
husband," "My wife/' which implies the same relation 
existing between master and slave; when speaking of 
one another only proper names should be used. These 
harmonial relations existing between two individual 
soul-entities with opposite sex expression were referred 
to in the Bible text, "Let no man put asunder what God 
hath joined together." Our modern version would be 
like this: NO MAN CAN PUT ASUNDER WHAT 
NATURE'S LAWS HAVE JOINED TOGETHER. Un- 
der such harmonial marital relations the husband and 
wife will daily grow more like one another intellectually, 
morally and spiritually, not for a time in earth existence, 
but throughout all eternity, for marriages of a heavenly 
order will simply be a continuous extension throughout 
all heavenly existence, with unspeakable bliss, joy and 
happiness. 

"But symphonies of peace, 
Resound as soul from soul, 
Go from the restless state 
Into the heav'nly goal." 

It is not pleasant, but duty compels us to recognize 
and consider the other side of this question from a moral 
as well as individual and social view point. The true 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 155 

home and family circle are the cornerstones of our edu- 
cational institutions and national existence. A thor- 
ough applicable knowledge of what home and family- 
relations really are should be vouchsafed boys and girls 
of the coming generation. Under the present knowledge 
and conception of the human being, marriage relations 
are entered into on the hit and miss plan, the two con- 
tracting parties being entirely ignorant of the true rela- 
tion existing between the invisible powers and forces 
operating in their being. It is nearly always the same 
old, old story of supposed love, more correctly called 
magnetic affinity, which in most cases is mistaken for 
true love. It may feel like the genuine article, just like 
a sour apple appears to taste sweet to a hypnotized 
subject. 

To make a long story short, hypnotism plays great 
pranks in the hands of Cupid, be it under the old tradi- 
tional mistletoe, or in an arbor of roses, with forget-me- 
nots at their feet, with no one but the moon and stars 
silently observing the blending process which to the clair- 
voyant vision looks like a great shower of electro-magnetic 
sparks flying like a meteoric stream from the positive to 
the negative party. This fact was expressed in the old 
English vocabulary in the familiar term, "Sparking a 
girl." This blending process may under favorable condi- 
tions by the great burning desire of the positive party, be 
quickly forced above the 50 per cent point, and as the 
two — male and female — at this stage of the blending 
process naturally draw closer together and the arm of 
the positive party finds its way round the waist of the 
negative, the blending process may be forced up to and 



156 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

even above the 75 per cent point; and if the question or 
rather suggestion is popped under these hypnotic influ- 
ences the negative party can give no other answer than 
"YES," and at times post-hypnotic promises may be 
exacted for which the positive party alone should be held 
responsible. We will here by way of explanation say 
that positive and negative does not always mean male 
and female with regard to the above attitude of the two 
sexes; although it may generally be held to be so. We 
have frequently made the statement that 75 per cent of 
all marriage contracts are simply a direct result of hyp- 
notic or mesmeric influence minus harmonial relation of 
soul-entities; and it is no wonder that the divorce courts 
in our land are doing nearly as large and a more lucra- 
tive business than the lisence clerk in the nearby office; 
and the same proceedings is steadily on the increase in 
spite of legislative efforts and prohibitive regulations of 
the church along religious lines ; and society, shaking and 
trembling with anxiety, anticipates the final result with- 
out being able to suggest any effective remedial agent. 

From carefully prepared records of the final result of 
all so-called affinity cases, it has been ascertained that all 
of them end in disgrace, desertion, wife-beating, aban- 
donment, ostracism, divorce, murder, suicide, poverty 
and flight from justice. This in itself is positive proof 
that this modern affinity craze has no relation to true 
soul affinity, but is simply its counterfeit — magnetic 
affinity — governed (by attendant hypnotic influences. 
Hence the sequel of the sequel is invariably the same. 

PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY teaches that : 
NO MAN CAN JOIN TOGETHER WHAT NATURE'S 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 157 

LAWS HAVE PUT ASUNDER. No man scientist or 
artist can make two discordant sound waves blend to- 
gether in harmony. No judge, priest or potentate can force 
a blending of discordant VITAL ELECTRO-MAGNETIC 
vibrations of two individuals of opposite sex, for these 
harmonious or discordant relations are governed by na- 
ture's immutable and inexorable laws from which there can 
be no appeal. These universal cosmic laws should be 
clearly understood by the contracting parties, who are at all 
times subject to musical laws, hence a perfectly attuned 
piano in the parlor should be the judgment bar before which 
Cupid could, with due respect to both parties' existing con- 
ditions , plead his case of harmony and discord. It is b ef or e 
this bar of eternal justice, sounding the divine music of true 
love, that the two contracting parties stand together in 
harmony, or asunder in discord, according to their natural 
born position on the scale of being — strike your two key- 
notes on the keyboard of the piano and find out just ex- 
actly where you are "at." It is better to find it out right 
there and then than later on under more trying circum- 
stances which Cupid may be blamed for when cupidity 
is the real cause. 

If this was done with a full and comprehensive under- 
standing of PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY, the 
divorce courts in our land would soon have to stop 
grinding their infamous grist for the lack of ignorant 
candidates eager for experimentation in marital relations. 

From the above declaration it may be clearly seen 
that the remedies we advocate for present matrimonial 
evils are, Harmony, Love and Wisdom as a major chord, 



158 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

and Self -Knowledge, its correct application and common 
sense and reason, as the relative minor chord. 

This self-knowledge and the new discovery of how to 
correctly ascertain the individual's location on the musical 
scale which determines the individual's keynote, the basic 
foundation of all existence, is clearly taught in the third 
octave of PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY, easy 
to be understood even by a foot racer. But we hear you 
say that a vast majority of people do not understand 
music and its laws, consequently these teachings could 
not be applied by them. This unfortunate fact we have 
wisely provided for by the invention and construction 
of a mechanical harmonial device, so simple that a child 
ten years old can learn to operate it by simply touching a 
button and the device will at once exhibit the various 
degrees of harmony and discord in any of the twelve 
chromatic scales, and thus show up the true harmonial 
relation existing between two human beings or a human 
being and any of the planets of our solar system, or the 
zodiacal signs, and the prismatic colors with their fiats 
and sharps; this multiple relation is absolute, just like 
2x2=4 in mathematics. This mechanical harmonial 
device will come out with the third volume, where we 
go deeper into the question of mesmeric and hypnotic 
influences, which when fully understood in all its bear- 
ings on marital relations, will solve the great matri- 
monial question in such a way that marriage will not be 
a failure. 

"Tried by the fires of love; 
Pierced by the Cupid darts, 
Sped by the force, a dove 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 159 

Holds in its heart of hearts, 
When to its mate it coos. 

Touched by the earthly state, 
Blindly it ardent woos, — 
Tool of the law of fate (?)" 

In conclusion we must explain what we mean by 
sensitiveness so that we may not be misunderstood. 
We do not mean that sensitive emotional feeling which 
really belongs to the attributes of the soul, expressed in 
sympathy, tenderness of heart, benevolence and love, 
but we mean that physical sense of feeling by which one 
thing or object may be distinguished from another. This 
feeling by and through which a person may feel the finer 
forces in nature, exists in various degrees, according to 
the degree of fineness and coarseness of material atoms of 
which the human organism is built. The finer the grade 
of composite material elements, forming tissues, nerves 
and cells in the human physical organism, the keener and 
more susceptible and responsive it is to the subtle, refined, 
vital electro-magnetic forces transmitted from one human 
being to another by touch, or in any other way coming 
in contact with these emanations. 

It is by this physical sense of feeling that a very sensi- 
tive person may feel even the different vibratory qualities 
of the electric and magnetic forces of another person, and 
by practice can be able to distinguish the different de- 
grees of the vitalization process. The emanations from 
a person located on F sharp, the vital center of the scale 
by reason of a perfect vitalization process, feels to the 
sensitive like a smooth, even flowing current; whereas 
from the person located on B, or between B and high C, 
the current produces an uneven and jerky sensation. 



160 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

The natural flow of the Vital Electro-Magnetic cur- 
rents in the arm is downwards toward the extremities of 
the nerves in the finger ends, and when a healer or hypno- 
tist touches the hand of another person for the purpose of 
transmitting these forces up the arm, that person, if 
sensitive, will feel a friction between the two force cur- 
rents. Sometimes when the current is of a very strong, 
magnetic nature, and the nerve system in the arm very 
much obstructed by the refuse or offal from an imperfect 
vitalization process, the current from the operator may 
not pass up the arm but seeks a course of least resistance 
through the nerve extremeties in the finger ends, which 
is felt by the sensitive subject as a prickling sensation, 
because of the extra volume of these forces escaping from 
these points. 

This sensitive condition is nearly always indicated by 
the fine silken texture of the hair. The coarser the grade 
of material from which the human organism is built, the 
coarser in texture will the hair be. This sensitiveness does 
not necessarily have any incorporate relation to moral- 
ity or immorality, which has little to do with hypnotic 
processes except as to furnish necessary opportunities. 

The fact that a hypnotized subject sometimes exhibits 
powers and knowledge that greatly transcends the normal 
possibilities of the subject and the operator, has always 
been a puzzle to the scientific world, and inasmuch as we 
have no more a subjective and objective mind upon 
which to saddle a burdensome and illogical explanation 
it becomes our duty to give a short explanation of above 
referred to phenomenon. 

Every student familiar with this subject knows that 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 161 

after a subject has been hypnotized and by suggestion 
brought into a semi-conscious state, the operator 
may deliver said subject over to another party who may 
exercise the same control of the subject as the operator 
himself, and this by reason of the fact that he 
was willing and consented to such a proceeding which 
became really a suggestion to the subject. When the 
operator does not by direct suggestive command forbid 
any one else to jointly enter the blending process, it 
becomes possible for another invisible party located on 
the same harmonious chord on the scale of vibration, 
perhaps an octave higher up, to enter the homocentric 
blending, which would now constitute a triune combina- 
tion. This newcomer would naturally by virtue of 
being located on a higher octave become the ruling factor 
in the combine, hence could take charge of and operate 
through all the avenues of expression, and through the 
subject deliver a most eloquent speech or play exquisite 
music, or by mental suggestion produce clairvoyant 
visions relative to things unbeknown to the subject, 
operator or any one else that may be present. 

Thus it may be clearly seen "how hypnotism produces 
the impression of ideas antagonistic to the operator/' 
For we have indeed a case similar to what is recorded in 
i Sam. x, 6: "And the spirit of the Lord will come upon 
thee, and thou shalt prophesy with them and shalt be 
turned into another man." 

Now just for the sake of giving the student an 

opportunity to apply these new teachings and observe 

the contrast between the new and the old explanation 

of hypnotic phenomena, we will reproduce a verbatim 

11 



162 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

account of the latest hypnotic phenomena witnessed by 
the public in the Old World at various times, which seems 
to puzzle psychologists of the old school in England and 
the Continent. 

From the Chicago Sunday Examiner of May 9, 1909, 
we copy the following: 

"That apparently is the well-authenticated phenome- 
non of Mme. Magdeleine, who from the trance into which 
she is thrown by Prof. Felix Magnin, of the Charcot 
Hospital in Paris, has developed an art in dancing that 
experts say is far and away ahead of all the sensational 
danseuses now appearing on the Continent. That there 
is no charlatanism in her performance appears to be well 
attested by the report of Freiherr Dr. von Schreck-Notz- 
ing, the famous German specialist, who introduced Mme. 
Magdeleine to the Psychological Society of Munich. 

"In fact, it seems that in Mme. Magdeleine a secondary 
personality is aroused by hypnotism, and that she then 
becomes a wonderful dancer. Normally she can dance 
little, is in fact, rather awkward, just as poor Trilby's 
voice was so shockingly bad except under the spell of 
Svengali. But unlike Trilby again, the normal personal- 
ity under the tuition of the abnormal may become as 
wonderful an artiste. 

"This woman has a curious history. It was first the 
chiming of a clock that caused the manifestation of the 
dancing girl. She was born in Tiflis. Her mother was 
a Georgian and her father a Swiss, who had gone to 
Persia, made an immense sum and lost it all, returning 
to his old home in Geneva when his danghter was but 
six years old. 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 163 

"It appears that she was given an ordinary musical 
education. This later developed into rather an extra- 
ordinary proficiency at the piano. When she was eigh- 
teen she went to Paris and at the age of twenty-five she 
married. She had two children. While nursing the 
last she became ill, suffering from increasingly violent 
headaches. She consulted many physicians and finally 
went to Professor Magnin. He hypnotized her three 
times a week. For a time there was nothing abnormal. 
Then one day he noticed that at the chiming of a certain 
clock in his room, her features assumed a curiously ec- 
static expression. This gave the doctor an idea. 

"Secretly he smuggled into the consultation chamber 
a musician. During the next treatment of his patient 
this musician played one of Chopin's mazurkas. Imme- 
diately Madame Magdeleine arose from the couch and 
began a dance quite the most amazing and beautiful 
either had ever seen. Awakening, she had no recollection 
of her performance, nor did the physician speak to her 
of it. But thereafter many experiments were tried. 
The most prominent French psychologists were brought 
before her. She danced in Rodin's studio and, at last 
told of her strange case, consented to appear in public. 
She danced first at the Opera Comique. There they 
dubbed her the dream dancer. 

"Kaulbach painted her portrait three times, Prof. 
A. von Keller, six times. Her victory was scientific as 
well as artistic. Sixteen specialists came to the unani- 
mous conclusion that, 'She was a woman subject to 
hysteria of the lighter degree — without attacks — who in 



164 PsychO'Hormonial Philosophy 

the hypnotic state is a dramatic-pantomimic artist of 
unparalleled natural elementary force.' 

"After having visited Dresden and Berlin, Madame 
Magdeleine retired into private life and devoted herself 
to musical studies in order that she might be able even- 
tually to use her great gifts in the waking state. In 1907 
she was engaged for a season as alto singer at the Ghent 
Opera, but though she was very successful, the time was 
not yet. She was dissatisfied, and with Professor 
Magnin took up her hypnotic performances again in a 
tour which led her through the principal towns of Hol- 
land and Belgium, Vienna, Budapest, Frankfort, Berlin 
and so to London. 

"Madame Magdeleine puts the matter very clearly. 
She is normally of an intensely impressionable artistic 
temperament, but the expression of it is held in check 
by the accidents of her more external self. The trance 
deadens the impediments and leaves the temperament 
free to express itself. 

" 'In fact, it is the state of ecstacy known to all artists 
in their first moments,' she said. 

" 'I am no automaton; I am an artist. Only I require 
to be put in the trance before I can give out my art.' 

11 * Genius or inspiration is scientifically a more or less 
incomplete state of hypnosis. 

" 'When I am in the trance I am not entirely dissas- 
sociated from my normal personality,' she continued. 
'A doctor once kept pricking my arm with a needle while 
I performed. I felt nothing, just went on dancing. It 
did not hurt me. I knew what he was doing.' 

" 'She has made little progress in the art since the 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 165 

strains of Chopin first awakened her/ said Professor 
Magnin. 'Of course there is a little in facility of motion, 
her limbs have become more supple. Otherwise she was 
just as fine an artist at first as she is now. The self 
that broke through from her trance was a great artist 
from the first.' 

" 'But/ interposed Madame Magdeleine, 'I am now 
in waking a much finer artist than I ever thought to be. 
I mean that in the trance I am becoming more and more 
conscious of what I am doing. It is as though that other 
self is teaching me. But I danced for some time before 
I ever knew what I was doing. Then once he showed 
me photographs of myself in a trance. I did not un- 
derstand. Nowadays there is a dim memory of the 
music in my mindjvhen I awaken, and even a remem- 
brance of how I danced it. 

" 'It seems to me that the two states — the sleeping 
and the waking — are tending to coincide. It is like two 
streams flowing and coming together.' 

"In her dancing Mme. Magdeleine apparently has no 
preference for any particular kind of emotion. If the 
music played is of a high order she will dance in har- 
mony with it. There are no strains too great or solemn 
for her to interpret. 

"On the other hand, if it is low or banal she dances just 
as fully in harmony with it. Strike a vulgar strain and 
she becomes vulgar. Strike a noble harmony and she is 
transfigured. She suffers only when a piece of music is 
not well sung or played, and a false note throws her al- 
most into convulsions. 

"Professor Magnin puts her in the hypnotic trance 



166 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

just before she appears upon the stage. It is as though 
he had created a new person. Her face changes in ex- 
pression, her whole body becomes graceful and languor- 
ous. It is, in fact, as though he had invoked another 
woman. She floats upon the stage, and the music be- 
gins at once. All the time the hypnotist stands in the 
wings unseen by the audience, and at every sign of wak- 
ing, for sometimes she falters and seems to be emerging 
into the normal, he throws her back again into a deeper 
trance by subtle motion and whispered word. When 
she leaves the footlights she comes straight to him, and 
sometimes there is a struggle to bring her back to her 
own personality, the secondary self being stimulated 
and strengthened by the applause and excitement. 

' 'There seems to be no fatigue after the dance. The 
whole case is one of the strangest that the psychologists 
of England and the Continent have had to deal with for 
a long time. It is really Du Mauri er's dream come to 
life, but in a saner, bigger form." 

We have at length in this chapter proved by analytic 
and synthetic logic, resting upon the most solid founda- 
tion, that our explanation of hypnotic processes and 
phenomena are true, and the corroborative proof may 
easily be had in actual demonstration — a demonstra- 
tion, however, only proves one thing, and that is that 
the phenomena actually do take place, hence a demon- 
stration should only be accepted as corroborative evi- 
dence in favor of a true explanation of the processes lead- 
ing up to and finally culminating in the phenomenon. 

It has been our aim and purpose to present our 
philosophy along these lines in such a simple way that 



Mesmerism and Hypnotism 167 

all our readers may arrive at a thorough and compre- 
hensive understanding of the law that governs hypnotic 
processes and consequential phenomena; that these 
powers and forces may be utilized for the benefit of 
humanity individually and collectively. 

The expansive unfoldment of inherent soul powers 
expressed through highly developed and trained facul- 
ties of expression and impression is the highest attain- 
ment of individual progress in physical as well as spiritual 
existence. Such harmonial progressive unfoldment of 
being toward Godlike perfection always leads to perfect 
health, happiness and success. 

"We may wonder why, wjth some person nigh, 

We always feel healthy, gay; 
And we learn to wait, for the trials, great, 

To speed, when he comes our way. 
It may, perhaps, be, though we do not see, 

We are under hypnotic spell, 
Through the blended state, that on harmonics wait, 

The law some employ so well. 

"As hypnosis may rest the soul, and stay 
The tide of discord for ease, 
So we, passive, gave him the right, and leave 

In mesmeric states, he sees, 
We so greatly need, and then, strong, indeed, 

We express the healing art, 
Influenced by him, then with eager vim, 
Alone, we can play our part." 

— L. E. Saxton. 

"On the mind of man is wrought 
A subtilized, mighty spell 



168 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

When blent with his every thought 
The thought from another's will. 

"And yet from celestial realms 

There has flashed to the mind of man 
From oversouls, with him tuned, 
These lessons your eyes now scan. 

"Tuned to the same true rhythm 
Blent with the electric thrill, 
One great harmonic mind 
Governs the Universe still." 

— Ellen T. Richie. 



pi 



CHAPTER IX 

Chromatic Scale of G Sharp 



it^ju- r ff r -^^^ p 



CLAIRVOYANCE, CLAIRAUDIENCE AND 
PSYCHOMETRY 

The thoughtful reader who has studied and analyzed 
the preceding chapter, should now be familiar with 
hypnotic processes and have a clear understanding of 
laws governing hypnotic phenomena, and be prepared 
to advance a step farther along the road leading to the 
temple of wisdom. To such a student it will be an easy 
matter to explain the processes involved in the phenom- 
ena of clairvoyance, clairaudience and psychometry. 

That these phenomena, or rather the processes in- 
volved in the production of clairvoyance and clairaud- 
ience, have been misunderstood by modern investigators 
and students of Psychology, will be made apparent 
when we throw the clear and penetrating search-light of 
Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy upon the subject, and 
thus reveal the true facts in this as well as all other 
psychic processes. 

We are independent enough not to cater to anyone's 

169 



170 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

personal opinion or pet theory. We shall here, as else- 
where, proclaim the real facts regardless of what any- 
one may say, think, believe, presuppose, or assume to 
be true. If we can not, by synthetic and analytic logic, 
supported by corroborative demonstration, prove that our 
explanation of the processes involved in the production 
of the phenomena of clairvoyance and clairaudience is 
true, we shall not expect the reader to accept it; for if 
it is not true, then it follows that it must be false, and 
should be cast into the rubbish pile to be a fit companion 
with all other falsehoods. 

Yet with all due respect to everybody's opinion, 
we shall ask, not only the clairvoyants themselves, but 
all those having accepted and believed the general pre- 
vailing explanation to be true, to lay aside all prejudice 
and honestly, thoughtfully, and judiciously weigh all 
the facts and evidence we here propose to introduce, and 
render judgment accordingly. 

Please do not all at once get on your high horse and 
say: "I know, because I have had practical self-experi- 
ence, I have seen clairvoyantly and heard clairaudiently 
hundreds of times and there can be no better proof than 
one's own personal experiences." But we want to re- 
mind the reader that personal experience along psychic 
lines are not always reliable, because they can be so 
easily misinterpreted and a valuable lesson misunder- 
stood. 

Let us formulate these thoughts into a clearer and 
more expressive language that we may be more fully 
understood: The fact that the phenomena actually do 
take place, is one thing that can be demonstrated; 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 171 

but to give a true explanation of the processes involved 
in the production of the phenomena, is quite another, 
and one that can not be proven by demonstration. 

Experience and demonstration only prove the fact 
that the phenomena were seen, heard or felt, and actually 
did take place, providing the physical sense organs were 
not tampered with at the time; but they do not in 
any way prove that the explanation given concerning 
the processes involved in the phenomena are true or false; 
hence it follows, that self-experience based upon dem- 
onstration should only be accepted as corroborative 
evidence supporting a true explanation based upon the 
law governing the production, of the phenomena. 

Every day we experience the rising and setting of the 
sun, but that does not in any way prove that our theory 
in regard to this daily phenomenon is true or false. We 
may observe and experience many different physical 
phenomena in nature upon which we may speculate and 
form various theories, which may be true or false and 
perhaps both. 

Let it here be clearly stated that we do not in any 
way deny the fact that the phenomena of clairvoyance 
and clairaudience actually do take place; but we do here 
enter our most emphatic and unqualified denial of the 
present accepted theoretical explanation of the clairvoy- 
ant, clairaudient and psychometric phenomena; namely, 
the temporary use of adequately developed spiritual 
sense organs being the perceptive faculties— by and 
through which these and other psychic phenomena are 
experienced, as commonly understood today. 

We shall just as strongly deny the theory that a hu- 



172 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

man soul may separate from the physical body, and in 
a temporary spirit body travel through space, visit 
distant places, appear in physical form and converse 
with friends, and even penetrate into spirit realms, 
and face to face converse with spirit beings of a higher 
or lower order. 

Kind readers and clairvoyant friends, do not get 
nervous now all at once, but gently apply the brake of 
common sense and reason to your preconceived ideas 
and quietly listen to the law and evidence that we shall 
present for your most rigid and analytical consideration. 

Everywhere throughout the different realms or king- 
doms of physical nature, wc find a real Chinese wall, 
hedging in by immutable laws the beings or inhabitants 
of each kingdom, which as a bulwark prevents such 
beings from entering the next higher kingdom above; 
each being must work out its own salvation in the king- 
dom into which it has been born, until by natural pro- 
cesses of death and birth along the great highway of evo- 
lutionary cyclic spirals of progressive unfoldment,such a 
being may attain a higher state and become qualified 
for expression of life-motion on a higher octave of exist- 
ence, and sing the Divine song of life in harmony with 
musical vibrations belonging to that octave. This new 
kingdom again presents to the newborn soul another 
series of progressive steps or stages of evolutionary 
unfoldment with environments of a higher rate of vibra- 
tory motion, or life expression. 

Now, if it is impossible for a being to jump from one 
kingdom to another in the physical realm (the result 
would be suicidal), how much more impossible would it 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 173 

be for a being to (even temporarily) jump from the physi- 
cal realm to the spirit realm of existence, where obviously 
such vast difference in environments must necessarily 
obtain; and furthermore, all this must be duly considered 
in connection with physical limitations which a human 
being on the physical plane is at all times subject to. 

It has been said: "There is nothing impossible for 
the human soul"; which is true in so far as it pertains to 
things belonging to the realm of existence the human 
soul may have attained; but at the very apex of human 
development on the physical plane the soul is confronted 
with the Divine fiat (natural law) saying, "So far shalt thou 
go," etc. It is at this critical point that the human 
soul must submit to humiliation in so-called death that 
it may be glorified in resurrection in the new birth into 
spirit realms of existence. "Unless ye be born again, ye 
can not enter the kingdom of heaven." 

The one standing on the apex of physical perfection 
relative to kingdoms below may truly say: "This is 
the way" — that the apex of the physical pyramid of 
perfection is the only gate through which beings of the 
lower kingdoms may enter the blissful states of spirits 
and angels. And again it is said: "There is no other 
name [gate] under heaven," etc. 

How beautiful these expressions are when we under- 
stand that the human state is the only way through which 
beings of lower kingdoms may enter the second grand 
division of existence — spirit realms — and be qualified to 
partake in the first resurrection as human souls ; for over 
them will the second death (death to the spiritual body) 
have no power. See Chap. Ill, First Octave, pp. 4 2 ~49- 



174 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

The more we study the primary constituent parts 
of the combination we call a human being, the manner in 
which the physical and spiritual bodies have simultan- 
eously cell by cell grown together in such intricate and 
inseparable combination, the more do we become con- 
vinced that a so-called astral projection, or the theory 
that a soul in a separated spiritual body, can at times 
leave the physical body and travel through space — is, 
and obviously must be, untenable — and that such sep- 
aration can only take place under and by the natural 
process called death. 

The physical material from which the physical body 
is formed can not hold its form the moment its correlated 
ethereal force substance is withdrawn; we only know 
material form as it appears to our sense perceptions. 
Material forms do not exist except in combination 
with its correlated ethereal force substance (spirit sub- 
stance). Whenever this ethereal substance becomes separ- 
ated from the physical material forming the cell, the cell 
form falls to pieces and returns to primary elements. 

The constant repetition of processes involved in 
evolutionary progress of form perfection operate from 
primate to ultimate and from ultimate to primate, and 
may be likened unto singing up and down the scale, 
from low C to high C and back again; sometimes only the 
dominant major chords maybe rendered, but the result 
is the same. 

These cellular activities in a well regulated cell- 
community are constantly manifested in disintegration 
and reintegration, under direct and indirect soul govern- 
ment, through the will and mind and all other avenues 



Clairvoyance, Clair audience and Psychometry 175 

of expression. Now, if the soul government should take a 
vacation and go on a wild goose chase for a few hours or 
days, the natural result could be nothing but chaos and 
death to the physical form. 

The supposition that the spiritual sense organs, corre- 
sponding to the five physical senses, can by some myste- 
rious means be developed to such a state of acuteness 
of perception that it becomes possible to see, hear and 
feel spiritual things, is in itself absurd, because in the 
first place it would be a transgression of physical laws, 
which prescribe certain limits and boundaries which 
must be respected. Under such physical limitations, 
the spiritual sense organs are completely submerged — in- 
operative — and impressions and expressions in a physical 
realm must and can only come in a natural way through 
physical sense organs; and we hold that in any of the 
three chief divisions of ontological existence, the sense 
organs adapted to each realm are the only ones that can 
be used in that realm; yet we do not deny that the 
other organs exist in potentially undeveloped states. 

A flower exists potentially in the very bulb or seed, 
but cannot manifest as a thing of beauty until a proper 
stage of development has been attained. A plant has 
three chief divisions of existence in which is exhibited 
first a crude baby leaf , simple inform and construction; 
in the second stage we find a leaf more beautiful and 
perfect in form and more complex in structure; in the 
third stage the ultimate climax of perfection has been 
attained in the beautifully colored petals of the flower. 

A butterfly exists potentially in the caterpillar, but 
as long as the caterpillar stage lasts the potential butter- 



176 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

fly is completely submerged, and must wait and work 
out its own salvation, crawling in dirt and mud until 
the law of evolution enforces its mandate of change. 
How silly and ridiculous it would be for a caterpillar to 
undertake to develop the potential butterfly wings in 
its first crude stage of existence, with the presumptuous 
idea of living upon the nectars of the gods obtainable 
from the alluring flowers in the field, without first passing 
through the chrysalis state (death) and being born into 
the kingdom of butterflies — the very act of transgressing 
nature's laws by trying to jump into kingdom come 
before the legitimate day of salvation has come, would 
abridge the desired result. 

It must be conceded by all thoughtful readers, that 
have at least to some extent observed evolutionary 
processes in nature, that our analysis of this subject so 
far outlined, must be true, and that the phenomena of 
clairvoyance, clairaudience and psychometry stand in 
need of another explanation that will harmonize with 
evolutionary laws in nature, an explanation that will 
explain the true processes and account for all the facts 
presented in the phenomena, an explanation supported 
by corroborative evidence resting upon the most solid 
foundation — Nature. 

The meaning of the French word clairvoyance is 
according to Webster's Dictionary: "Literally, clear- 
sightedness ; a power attributed to a person in a mesmeric 
state, of observing objects not present to the senses." 

Let us first call your attention to the fact that Web- 
ster does not say spiritual clearsightedness, and surely 
does not refer to anything but physical sense of sight by 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 177 

which a clairvoyant person sees objects that are far 
beyond the ordinary limit of vision, or in the mesmeric 
state observes "objects not present to the senses," and 
which, in some instances, do not exist at all. It is here 
where the students of Clairvoyance have first become 
bewildered, and jumped at conclusions that would some- 
what bridge over the entanglement. 

To see objects with the physical sense of sight, that 
were not present to the physical sense organs, is a pro- 
position the student could not grasp with his erroneous 
understanding of the mesmeric state; hence it became 
necessary to misconstrue Webster's meaning and say 
that clairvoyance — clear seeing — referred to spiritual 
sense organs; this conclusion was to some extent sup- 
ported by the fact that the clairvoyant could see these 
objects with eyes closed just as well as when open, and 
of course it was assumed that the physical sense of sight 
was not employed. 

This seemingly well founded and fairly well supported 
conclusion will be swept aside as erroneous when we 
come to have a clear understanding of the process in- 
volved in this phenomenon. 

We, however, take exception to Webster's statement 
when he says: "That the clairvoyant power is attributed 
to a person in the mesmeric state." Clairvoyance can 
not exist outside of mesmeric or hypnotic processes, and 
it follows that in order to obtain the clairvoyant pheno- 
menon, some one must first induce the mesmeric or 
hypnotic state; hence it follows that the clairvoyant 
power does not reside in the person that is in the mesmeric 
state, but in the one that induces the mesmeric state; 
12 



178 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

clairvoyance being the result of suggestions given by 
the operator to a sensitive subject in the mesmeric state, 
can not be anything but a mesmeric or hypnotic pheno- 
menon, produced through the avenues of impression, 
which carry the suggested idea to the inner realm of 
consciousness without the use of physical or spiritual 
sense organs of sight. 

Clairvoyance is a result of mental or oral suggestions 
given by an invisible or visible operator that has under 
favorable conditions induced the mesmeric state by the 
blending of Vital Electro- Magnetic forces of the operator 
and the sensitive subject. The phenomenon of clair- 
voyance can be demonstrated to take place all the way 
from the 60% point, where the subject is in a normal 
conscious state and does not know that hypnosis is the 
agent causing the subject to "see objects not present to 
the physical senses," and retain memory of what has been 
seen, up to and above the 75% point, where the subject 
in the unconscious state may see and describe "objects 
not present to the senses," and may or may not retain 
any memory of what has been seen. 

A physical, visible hypnotist may by suggestion pro- 
duce clairvoyant visions to the hypnotized sensitive 
subject, only along lines where his conceptions can frame 
the necessary mental pictures to be embodied in the sug- 
gestion; in other words, he can not induce a vision of 
that which he knows nothing about. 

If a vision is presented to the subject entirely foreign 
to any suggestion that could be given by the hypnotist, 
it is and must be the result of a mental suggestion from 
an invisible operator, that has under favorable conditions 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 179 

and opportunity entered into the blending process, which 
then becomes trinal in place of dual. Such an intruder 
(intruder when not desired, but a legitimate helper 
when desired) can by virtue of being the dominant con- 
trolling factor, take the hypnotized subject entirely 
out of the hands of the operator that initiated the blend- 
ing process, and in the future again initiate the blending 
process and produce the clairvoyant and clairaudient 
phenomena, whenever condition and opportunity is given 
by the sensitive subject. 

It is obvious that great care should be exercised 
when a sensitive subject gives necessary conditions for 
hypnotic control, for it has in some cases led to obsession 
with dire results to the subject. 

If you willingly permit a person to start a fire in a 
stove, you must certainly have implicit confidence 
that said person will not start the fire for the purpose of 
burning the whole house with all its contents, for you 
only want that fire started for what benefit and comfort 
might be derived therefrom. In our everyday actions, 
motives often concealed in the background of conscious- 
ness determines the moral status of the individual; it 
being good or bad cuts no figure in hypnotic blending 
processes, except as to opportunity. 

A sensitive person giving necessary conditions for 
hypnotic blending processes initiated by a spirit operator 
called "a guide," is generally known by the term "me- 
dium.' ' 

A medium is anything that conveys or obstructs the 
passing of things from one point to another, there being 
resisting mediums and refracting mediums ; but in the sense 



180 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

we here employ the term it means : A sensitive person by 
and through whom spirit intelligence may under least 
resistance convey messages and otherwise manifest their 
presence, through the physical avenues of impression and 
expression. 

Mediumship is the bridge upon which the spiritual 
and physical forces (positive and negative) meet and 
blend in polarity, just as modulation in music is the bridge 
upon which harmony of two different keys meet in 
polarity; the ultimate and primate embracing each other 
in homocentric blending, as low and high C blend in 
polarization of harmonial relations. 

A clairvoyant medium is the instrument, the sensi- 
tive subject through which a spirit being (understanding 
the law that governs hypnotic processes), through the 
avenues of impression, suggests to the medium mental 
pictures of what the spirit operator desires the medium 
to see, while in the hypnotic state; such a clairvoyant 
vision is to the medium a conscious reality, just as much 
as when a physical hypnotist suggests to a subject that 
he sees so and so, and the subject really sees those things 
although they "are not present to the senses." 

In the hypnotic state the human mind (the principal 
avenue of impression) being under the control of the 
hypnotist does not question as to the merits of a suggestion, 
but transmits to the realm of consciousness a false sug- 
gestion just as well as a true one. 

A clairvoyant medium may see things that actually 
exist, or things that do not exist, the latter being a sym- 
bolic representation of things that did exist in the past, 
or of something that will come to pass in the future; such 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 181 

symbolic visions may or may not be truly interpreted 
by the medium. 

At this point it may be well to explain how the hyp- 
notist can by oral suggestion cause the subject to "see 
objects or things not present to the sense of sight." 
The oral suggestion passes along the regular channels of 
hearing until it comes to the auditory nerve center in 
the brain where the mind takes up the impressed sugges- 
tion that such an object or thing is seen, and at once 
transmits this information to the realm of consciousness 
where the human soul really sees the object or thing as 
described in the suggestion, in the same way as when 
such information comes through the regular channels 
connected with the organs of sight. This explains how 
a clairvoyant can "see objects not present to the physical 
sense of sight," or see with the eyes shut just as well as 
when wide open. The processes in clairaudience are the 
same and of course subject to the same explanation and 
need not here be repeated. 

The most perplexing phenomena and seemingly 
mysterious results may sometime occur when the clair- 
voyant and clairaudient phenomena take place both at 
the same time: for instance, a clairvoyant and clair- 
audient medium may see a spirit form as real as a human 
physical form possibly could be, and at the same time 
hear that form speak in audible voice as real as any human 
being could speak, and carry on an audibly intelligent 
conversation; when the real facts are, that under hyp- 
notic suggestions from an invisible operator the ideal 
was simply transferred into the actual, the subjective 



182 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

transferred into the objective, by the above named pro- 
cesses. 

A thoughtful reader can not now fail to see how the 
above described processes become the means by which 
a spirit being may be able to manifest its presence and 
communicate through the great avenue of impression, the 
only channel through which a spirit being can by mental 
processes reach the human consciousness on the physical 
plane of existence. 

Talk about independent clairvoyant mediumship 
is therefore illogical, for in reality it does not and can not 
exist; the blending process is simply of such low degree 
that it cannot be discerned by the medium or any 
one else, hence the phenomenon is supposed to be inde- 
pendently produced by the medium's own psychic powers. 

If clairvoyance and clairaudicncc were independent of 
hypnotic processes, such a medium could at any time 
when so desiring, see and hear spiritual things; see and 
hear not only certain things, but all spiritual things rela- 
tive to spirit existence. All such mediums would see and 
hear all spiritual things just alike. 

In the trance state (complete control of all physical 
sense organs) a sincere religious medium will see heaven, 
God, and hell just as pictured out in the Bible; the invis- 
ible suggester being a believer in such Bible represen- 
tations, of course gives suggestions accordingly; another, 
not believing in Bible stories, will see heaven entirely 
different according to suggestions given by the invisible 
intelligent operator. 

We challenge anyone to show us a clairvoyant or 
clairaudient medium that is not a natural born sensitive, 



Clairvoyance , Clair audience and Psychometry 183 

a good hypnotic subject, susceptible to hypnotic influence 
when conditions and opportunities are given! It is 
possible that a "working hypothesis" might be constructed 
that would compel the phenomenon to take place with- 
out these requisite processes and conditions, but such a 
hypothesis would in science be thereby proven false. 

It has been recorded that persons not known to be 
mediumistic have seen so-called spectres, ghosts, wraiths, 
apparitions, another person's double, called by theoso- 
phists astral projections. 

It has lately been put on record, that a mediumistic 
lady, while socially conversing with a gentleman friend in 
broad daylight, began to show change in features, which 
progressed and finally culminated in a complete transfor- 
mation of the person, and in place of the lady who seeming- 
ly had entirely disappeared, there sat an old man, semi- 
bald, with gray hair, mustache and beard, and when asked 
as to how she felt, she laughingly insisted that the ob- 
server was jesting and trying to be funny. This old 
gentleman started a conversation with the observer in 
a strong masculine voice with a foreign accent, etc. 

It is barely possible that such a manifestation could 
have been a materialization. Such a theory would have 
to explain how two physical bodies could occupy the 
same place at the same time; how a materialized shell 
could exist as a covering on the outside of another 
permanent body, without the lady in question being 
aware of such a material covering. The lady not being in 
a trance, but in a normal state, would certainly have 
been aware of such a fact. Hence it certainly follows 
that such a manifestation could not have been a material- 



184 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

ization, but must have been a result produced in the con- 
sciousness of the observer by suggestions given by an 
invisible operator, who caused the observer to "see and 
hear things not present to the senses." 

We will call attention to just one statement in a spirit 
communication given through a clairvoyant medium 
in Chicago, Illinois, who after witnessing a beautiful 
clairvoyant vision in a semi-trance state, was instructed 
by mental suggestions from the spirit operator as follows : 
"You have not experienced a reality, but have only been 
shown a vision or thought-formed phenomenon by mental 
suggestions, just as a human hypnotist can (and does) 
suggest his thoughts to a proper subject." 

There is no comment needed here, the language is 
clear enough to be self-evident, but this question might 
be asked : Why have not intelligent spirit operators 
given a clear explanation of this phenomenon long ago? 
We will answer the question by asking: Why does a 
spirit being, when manifesting his or her presence in a 
seance room, always ask if so and so is present? when 
they obviously know beforehand whether they are present 
or not. Habitual modes of expression, and perhaps 
ignorance of real facts may be the real factors in such 
cases. 

At various times apparitions have been seen in all 
kinds of forms, resembling persons living and dead; and 
of course various explanatory theories have been given. 
The most common explanation of these phenomena, 
in these latter days, is based upon "Telepathy," which 
has been compelled to answer for a multitude of sins, 
and perform the duty of a modern Paul, by explaining 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 185 

"all things unto all men," by stretching and pulling 
theories and facts in correspondence with zealous efforts 
to arrive at some kind of an explanation from material- 
istic standpoints along supposed scientific lines, rather 
than admit of true facts much more readily understood. 

We shall close this chapter by asking all honest 
investigators of the clairvoyant and clairaudient pheno- 
mena, to apply our explanation and find out for them- 
selves that we have spoken the truth and nothing but 
the truth. 

You may in a most satisfactory manner test the valid- 
ity of our explanation in this simple way : If you ever 
meet a person that has at any time seen an apparition, 
a ghost, or a spectre, you can unhesitatingly declare that 
such a person is a sensitive, and susceptible to hypnotic 
influence when condition and opportunity is given. 

In this chapter we have explained how a spirit being 
may control the five physical sense organs of a physical 
being. But there is, no doubt, a large number of readers 
who do not even believe that spirit beings exist, that have 
no knowledge of the continued existence of the human 
soul after so-called physical death. 

To all such readers we will truly say, that this book 
is not written for the special purpose of convincing any 
one of the truth of spiritual science. We have written 
this with the idea that our readers are fully convinced 
of the fundamental fact of continuity of existence. This 
is the age of psychic phenomena, indeed, we might call 
it the psychic era, and of course it would naturally be 
supposed that all well informed people possessed this 



186 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

priceless knowledge, and that skepticism on such an im- 
portant subject would be entirely out of order. 

Dr. T. J. Hudson, in his Law of Psychic Phenomena, 
says on page 206 : 

"The man who denies psychic phenomena today is 
not entitled to be called a skeptic; he is simply ignorant; 
and it would be a hopeless task to attempt to enlighten 
him." 

The noted English scientist, Alfred Russel Wallace, 
recently said: "No more evidence is needed to prove 
spiritualism, for no accepted fact in science has a greater 
or stronger array of proof in its behalf." Now, friends, if 
you have not this knowledge you can do nothing better 
than at once diligently seek for it, it is here to be found; 
but truth can not be forced upon anybody, it would 
smack too much of pearls being thrust into unappreciat- 
ing hands. If you do not find this pearl of truth, it 
will certainly be your own fault in neglecting to obtain 
that which is really your inherits 

Ultraviolet rays, reflected from an otherwise invisible 
object, may be seen by physical vision of a high degree 
of keenness and a sensitive optic nerve that responds to 
these subtle rays. This may truly be called actual 
independent clairvoyance, and docs really exist, and will 
no doubt become more general in the future, when the 
human race has advanced a few more steps along the 
great highway of evolutionary unfold men t of the organs 
of sight. 

It is recorded, that at a time not so very far remote 
the human being could only see three colors, the red, 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 187 

yellow and blue, and that our antediluvian ancestors 
saw only these three primary colors in the rainbow. 

We have often seen four colors above the violet in 
the rainbow, that would be up to F in the next octave, 
but can not describe these tints for the lack of words 
to convey a true description. This we hold to be the only 
actual independent clairvoyance. But to what degree 
such independent clairvoyance may exist under present 
conditions and development of supersensitive mediums, 
or to what degree it may extend in the future under evo- 
lutionary changes of human sense organs, or the develop- 
ment of potential functional sense activities of the sense 
of sight, is not for us to say. 

Evolutionary processes, leading towards perfection 
along lines of least resistance, culminating in growth and 
expansion, may bring out potential powers of the human 
soul-entity while existing in the physical realm far be- 
yond our present conception; in the physical kingdoms 
in nature we do indeed observe prophetic foregleams of 
such functional sense possibility. When we in our 
researches in physical nature pass from one octave to 
another we always find a connecting h link, — a high C — 
the connecting bridge resting upon the shore banks of 
a lower and higher octave, which often is of such a 
nature that it is impossible to ascertain to what octave 
it really belongs, and it naturally follows as a corollary 
that such connecting links must also exist between the 
higher and lower octaves in the spiritual kingdoms, as 
well as between the octaves of the physical and spiritual 
realms. 

Let it now be understood by the foregoing postulate, 



188 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

that the independent clearsightedness may by reason of 
the blending of higher and lower sense perceptions on the 
high C bridge, become a compromise between physical 
and spiritual sense perceptions, and enable the individ- 
ual on this high C bridge to exercise functional sense 
activities belonging to both realms, in other words, 
possess sense organs of sight which respond to light vibra- 
tions on both octaves in various degrees, but this cannot 
be classified under the term clairvoyance as understood 
today. 

This hypothesis may appear more logical if we accept 
the idea that functional sense activity may be extended 
so as to cover a full octave of seven physical senses, with 
functional sense perceptions governed by the musical 
law of harmonial progressive reproduction, in the first of 
the three grand cubical squares of existence, constituting 
the minor chord of being. 

The sixth and seventh physical sense corresponding to 
A and B on the musical scale, can not now be described 
for the want of adequate terms in our language. In the 
near future when capacities, powers and forces, operating 
in the invisible realm of the human being, become better 
understood, adequate descriptive terms will be given to 
these higher sense perceptions, and the Psychic realm 
of the human being will give up its mysteries to the tire- 
less investigator. 

Another important fact connected with this subject 
must also be considered, so the reader may not fall into 
erroneous conceptions and land in the traditional fog 
bank and misconstrue our meaning into illusionary 
moonshine for critical purpose. 



Clairvoyance, Clair audience and Psychometry 189 

In the eleventh chapter of this octave we shall conclu- 
sively show that the possibility exists for spirit beings— 

under certain well defined conditions and opportunities 

to lower the rate of etheric vibratory activities of the 
ethereal body, and all other forms or objects composed of 
ethereal substances, down to that point on the scale of 
vibration where the ultra violet ray is reflected — as exem- 
plified in spirit photography — persons highly supersensi- 
tive, possessing physical clearsightedness here spoken of 
as independent clairvoyance, will clearly see such forms 
and objects, without the use of submerged spiritual sense 
organs of sight, which are intended for sense perception 
in the spiritual realms of existence. 

This lucid explanation of independent clairvoyance 
can equally as well be applied to what might be called 
independent clairaudience and independent psychometry, 
for the processes of the various sense capacities are the 
same, hence the explanation of the different yet closely 
connected phenomena must necessarily be the same, 
resting upon the same solid basic foundation. 

Clairvoyance as understood today is only inherently 
possessed and exercised by spirit beings in degree cor- 
responding to their individual development. But it is 
said: "We are spirits now, why can we not now exercise 
this spirit sense of sight?" 

Yes, we are and always have been soul-entities, ex- 
pressing attributes, powers and capacities hedged in 
with limitations commensurate with our advancement 
on the various stages of evolutionary and progressive 
unfoldment of the triune combination constituting being, 
with functional activities operating along lines of least 



190 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

resistance in the various octaves, on keynotes governed 
by the immutable law of harmonial progressive reproduc- 
tion, which can not be abrogated. 

Subjective clairvoyance should not be confounded 
with mental visions, for there is a marked distinction 
between the processes producing the phenomena ; neither 
can we consistently use the term objective clairvoyance, 
for such a thing does not really exist, for in last analysis 
of processes involved in the production of the phenomenon 
of perceiving things "not present to the senses," we 
find that all sensations in the realm of consciousness 
obviously must be subjective. An objective sense percep- 
tion — which, however, does not exist in what is com- 
monly called clairvoyance — can only be realized by the 
subjective operation of the MIND — the principal avenue 
of impression — producing the sensation in the realm of con- 
sciousness, where the human soul-entity perceives, knows 
and understands. A spirit being communicating through 
a medium under full hypnotic trance-control should 
not be classed as clairvoyant power possessed by the 
medium, whose individual consciousness is for the time 
being submerged in the state of passivity. 

PSYCHOMETRY 

Psychometry is a phenomenon that is closely related 
to clairvoyance and clairaudience, and must be considered 
in the same chapter. 

In Webster's Dictionary, we find psychometry de- 
fined as, "The act of measuring the duration of mental 
processes or determining the true relation of mental 
phenomena.' ' 



Clairvoyance, Clair audience and Psychometry 191 

In this definition the ambiguous term "mental pro- 
cesses" is misleading, inasmuch as it does not convey the 
idea intended to be conveyed by the term "Psychometry. " 
The Greek word Psyche, meaning Soul, has no reference 
to mind activity or mental processes, hence we can not 
think of Psychometry in connection with mental pro- 
cesses, but must strictly confine our analysis of this 
subject to Soul activities exclusively, and adhere strictly 
to the distinction we have described between soul activity 
and mind action, between an idea and a thought. For 
it is only by recognizing this true classification, that we 
can have clear sailing on the billowy ocean of psychic 
phenomena. 

With this understanding, the term Psychometry can 
mean nothing but measurement of soul powers, which is 
a great deal more than measurement of mental processes ; 
for mental processes are only the effect of the former, 
which as the initiative cause originates the latter, which 
in most cases consist of an idea being formulated into 
thought along the avenue of expression. 

In the same way and for the same reason that we 
discarded the present accepted theories of clairvoyance 
and clairaudience, are we compelled to discard present 
accepted explanations of Psychometry. For we hold 
that it is impossible for a human being in the physical 
realm of existence to measure soul powers, for they are 
unlimitable. Or to be able to read the history of a soul- 
entity, by holding in the hand an article from said per- 
son, or to read the history of an inaminate object, where 
there is no soul-entity, with attributes and powers to 
measure. 



192 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

The human soul-entity, and all other soul-entities, 
and all inanimate objects, no doubt have a history. 
But the history of self-existence is a problem never to be 
solved by reason or measured by any physical being; its 
historic pages lie far beyond the capacity of the human 
mind with such development as may be possible on the 
physical plane. 

Psychometry is said to be a power attributed to 
certain persons or rather individuals, enabling them to 
/measure or reveal the history of the "soul of things;" 
but the human soul-entity is not the "soul of a thing." 
It is the undcfmable, incomprehensible, invisible some- 
thing that emanated from the ever flowing infinite soul 
fountain, which stubbornly refuses to be analyzed or 
circumscribed, possessing inherently unlimited powers and 
potentialities. The expression of these powers always 
corresponds with the realm it may exist in, and the stage 
of development it may have attained ; always subject 
to limitations in conformity to natural laws governing 
in such realm, which can not be transcended. 

Now let it be understood that we do not deny that the 
phenomenon called Psychometry actually does take pi 
that is, that a person at times is able to read another 
person's past physical history more or less correctly, 
and even delineate past events of inanimate objects. 
But this power is not inherent with the psyehometrist no 
more than the clairvoyant power is possessed by the 
clairvoyant medium. And we are compelled to say, 
that the psychometric power does not reside with the 
psyehometrist, but with the one that induces the mes- 
meric or hypnotic state, in which this phenomenon, like 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 193 

clairvoyance, does take place; for psychometry is a phe- 
nomenon obtainable only under mesmeric or hypnotic 
influences. 

The hypnotist generally being an invisible, so-called 
control, or spirit "Guide" that knows, and at other times 
ascertains facts related to the person or the inanimate 
object whose character or history is tp be delineated, com- 
municates this to the psychometrist under hypnotic 
processes, now well understood, which need not here 
be repeated. 

A close, observing student of this phenomenon will 
often notice, that although an article of some kind is 
generally called for from the person desiring a reading, 
such reading is often given without the article which is 
supposed to form a connecting link between the psycho- 
metrist and the one whose character is to be delineated ; 
such readings may be given to an entire stranger in a 
promiscuous audience without any contact whatever. 
Hence such method seems to be superfluous, and this 
fact itself becomes an evidence in favor of our explanation. 

There seems to be a mass of red tape connected with 
this phenomenon, colored with superstition and mysti- 
cism, that should be relegated back to the ancient rubbish 
pile, so that the phenomenon of psychometry may shine 
in the realm of cause and effect, as clear as an unobstructed 
noonday sun. 

Psychometry then, should be understood to be a 
phenomenon resulting from suggestion given under hypno- 
tic influences, by and through which the invisible spirit 
hypnotist takes control of the physical sense called feeling, 
and through this avenue of impression conveys ideas to 
13 



194 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

the sensitive psychometrist, in exactly the same way as 
ideas are conveyed to the clairvoyant medium through 
the physical sense of sight, for example: A clairvoyant 
diagnoses disease by actually seeing the diseased con- 
dition of an affected organ; whereas the psychometrist 
is made to feel the symptoms of the disease in his own 
organism, corresponding to the symptoms felt by the 
patient, hence can readily tell how and where the pa- 
tient is affected. 

Again the psychometrist may be made to feel all 
kinds of sensations, from which he is to interpret the 
ideas intended to be conveyed by the spirit operator; 
these feelings cover such a large range, that they can 
not here be enumerated; let it suffice to say, as an ex- 
ample : The psychometrist experiences a feeling as though 
he was in contact with or in the presence of a war-like 
action on a battlefield, followed by a weary, depressed 
or sorrowful feeling, which would be interpreted to mean 
that some one closely connected with the one now being 
read, had been killed in battle. If the psychometrist 
should have the clairaudient phase of mediumship de- 
veloped, he may hear the name of the party that fell on 
the battlefield, and finally establish the true relationship. 

In connection with this subject, we will recall a few 
facts that all sensitives no doubt have experienced. 
An article of any kind having been in the possession of 
or worn by a person for some time becomes impregnated 
with that person's vital elrctro-magnctic forces. Tli 
forces vary in degree of vibratory frequencies according 
to that person's location on the musical scale; in other 
words, a person's rate of vibration is in exact multiple 



Clairvoyance, Clairaudience and Psychometry 195 

relation to the note on the musical scale that such person 
may be located on. These variations of vibratory fre- 
quencies can readily be felt and classified by an experi- 
enced sensitive, just as well as a trained musician can 
hear and classify the different sounds from the various 
notes. 

Now, let the sensitive psychometrist hold a letter 
in his hand written by a person located on or between 
B and high C and a strong magnetic current may be felt 
in the hand and arm; the magnetic current from such a 
person always produces a jerky sensation in the nerves 
and muscles of the arm similar to the current from an 
electric battery, only milder. The reason of this is, that 
two-thirds of the magnetic force of such a person is 
un vitalized, whereas, when all the magnetic force has 
by virtue of the vitalization process become a vital 
motive energy in a person located on or between F, F 
sharp and G, the sensation felt by the sensitive, holding 
an article from such a person, is smooth and soothing. 

These sensations are again modified or intensified 
by the harmonious or discordant relation existing between 
the two notes the two parties are located on, whether 
they form major or minor chords. 

This, then, is actual psychometry — measurement of 
soul powers — the powers of the human soul expressed 
through the will and the mind under whose action upon 
the brain the vital electro-magnetic forces become the 
causative agent of all the activities pertaining to the 
human being. 

Now it may be clearly seen that the feeling experienced 
in psychometry is really the same as the feeling the per- 



196 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

cipient experiences in telepathy, the only difference is: 
In the former, the sense of feeling in the sensitive me- 
dium — psychometrist — is instilled by the spirit operator 
under hypnotic influence, whereas in the latter case, the 
sense of feeling in the percipient is under similar influence 
instilled by the spirit operator, through the telepathist; 
the blending process in the first case is dual, in the se- 
cond case it becomes trinal. 

"Ah, brother, never more alone, 

Darkness is vanished now, 
We know as we are known, for truth 
Illuminates the brow. 

"This clairvoyant ray doth shed 
Its beauty over the earth, 
And never more, man need deny 
Its spiritualistic worth." 

— 5. F. Tooley. 



CHAPTER X 



Chromatic Scale of A 



jM-ni: 



Fi P^tn 



S£ 



TELEPATHY 

THE LANGUAGE OF THE SOUL 

We have now come to a subject that needs careful 
handling, that a true explanation may be given of this 
phenomenon, erroneously called thought transference. 
Students and investigators along this line hold that a 
thought can be transferred, that is, sent over, bag and bag- 
gage, to some one else. If such was the case, the one that 
transferred the thought to some one else could no longer 
have that thought, because the whole thing had been 
sent to another party. If one half of the thought had 
been sent, we can see how the other half might be held 
by the thought transferer. The fact is, that while he 
is transferring that stubborn thing called thought, he is 
still all the time holding that very same thought within 
himself. A legitimate question seems to be in order 
here: How is it possible for a person to transfer some- 
thing to some one else and still all the time hold possession 
of that something? We pause for an answer. 

197 



198 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

There may be such a thing as thought transference, 
but we do not know it, hence we cannot explain what we 
do not understand. We are, however, going to explain 
* 'Telepathy," and the processes by which this phenomenon 
is produced. 

Telepathy according to the Universal Dictionary 
means: "The feeling or experience of sensations at a 
distance from another person." This definition involves 
primarily the physical sense of feeling; a telepathic 
experience may be a sensation of pain or suffering, or a 
peculiar sensation of electro-magnetic impulses imping- 
ing on the sense of feeling, somewhat resembling the 
sensations produced by a mild current from an electric 
battery. 

It was this peculiar sensation that Shakespeare re- 
ferred to when he said: 

"By the pricking of my thumbs 
Something wicked this way comes." 

The extended meaning of telepathic experience of 
sensation, may also include emotional sensation in the 
realm of human consciousness, produced in this case by 
the interactive soul power of another soul-entity at a 
distance; but a sympathetic emotional feeling, resulting 
from a blending of soul forces of two individuals when 
harmonial relations exist, can not really in fact be classed 
as telepathy. 

It should, however, be understood here that all things 
we come in contact with produce sensations in the realm 
of our consciousness, yet we have to discriminate be- 
tween their different modes of action that their meaning 
may be clearly understood. 



Telepathy 199 

Having now a clear comprehension of the lexicogra- 
phic definition of telepathy, we shall endeavor to ex- 
plain the processes involved in the production of the 
phenomenon called telepathy. 

The stumbling block over which most investigators 
have fallen and got bewildered, seems to be the erroneous 
conception of the primary factors in the triune combina- 
tion called man, including all the higher faculties of ex- 
pression and impression, together with the powers and 
forces operating in the invisible realm of the human 
being, which has resulted in a false conception of what 
thought really is; with no clear distinction between 
thought and an idea. We often read expressions like 
this: "Thought is the greatest power in the universe." 
"Thought created the universe." "As a man thinkest 
so he is," etc. The real fact is, that there is no inher- 
ent power in thought ; thought is simply a subordinate 
avenue of expression of power inherent in the human 
soul. Thought is a vibratory force, resulting from mind 
activity on the brain cells for the purpose of transferring 
the ideal into the actual. An idea is the very first con- 
ception of something to be embodied in thought for 
ultimate expression in words and actions. Thoughts are 
the feeding springs of adequate action, and ideas are the 
feeding springs of adequate thoughts. An idea is born, 
not in the mind, but in the human soul long before the 
thought existed. 

Dr. J. M. Peebles once said: "Thoughts are vibra- 
tory, etherealized spirit forces with their basic ideal 
origin in the human soul-entity." 

Now if we fully understand the above, we learn that 



200 Psych o-Ha rm o n ia I Ph ilosophy 

"thought" is only an effect, and an effect cannot repro- 
duce itself nor the cause that brought it into existence. 
In order to produce an original thought, the idea subse- 
quently embodied in the thought must originate and spring 
from the human soul, and through the will and mind 
find its way along the labyrinthian avenues of expression 
and emerge from the human brain a fullfledged thought - 
ling, ready to do business in the little brain called cere- 
bellum, for the expression of words and actions; or the 
stimulation of all functional activities for the upbuilding 
and preservation of the physical organic structure; or it 
may flash through space as the agent of speculation 
when we think about something at a distance. 

It has been said that a thought wave when once set in 
motion will continue its onward course throughout all 
eternity. Then in the next breath it has been said that 
thoughts like chickens come home to roost. Now if 
the last saying is true, it will stop the wild goose chase 
of the former; hence all the old thoughts that mankind 
have been thinking for the last few million years may 
be found lurking around the chicken roosts of the thinker, 
which would indeed be a great relief to the thought realm, 
and the one desiring to practice thought transference 
can select no better place than the old chicken coop for 
the experiment, and if proper connection existed with 
neighbors or friends at a distance, one might stir up things 
(thought) and perhaps make the feathers fly. 

In passing let us say, that a thought wave possesses 
no inherent qualities for eternal existence, but an idea 
like a principle does always exist, whether it comes to 
the surface in the realm of human consciousness or not; 



Telepathy 201 

an idea may exist on other planes of consciousness long 
before the human conceptive faculties become receptive 
to the thought embodied in such idea. 

We may think about a thing, by projecting our thought 
force and connect with a certain thing at a great distance 
from us; but the moment the dynamic power of the hu- 
man soul acting through the will is withdrawn, the thought 
projection stops; the connection is broken; the vibratory 
thought force becomes a thing that once was but is no 
more, until again reproduced. 

As long as we continue to produce sonorous vibrations, 
sound waves will be sent out in space but will go no 
farther than where the resisting power of the atmosphere 
becomes equal to the impinging sound waves. 

A mill will grind just as long as the motive power is 
continually applied. The electric current will flash from 
the positive to the negative pole, only when there is 
sufficient motive power behind to make it do so; with- 
draw the dynamic motive power from the electric light 
current and see how quickly the light goes out. 

In nature's force realm, we can find no logical corres- 
pondence supporting the supposition that thought will 
continuously travel through ethereal space constituting 
thought realms, and to some extent affect the present 
living generation as an impressional environment. If 
such was the case, we fear that evolution along the line 
of good morals would stand a very poor show. 

A thought is not an entity and will exist only as long 
as the dynamic power of the human soul through mind 
activity upon the brain keeps up the vibratory motion 
of the brain cells — when that motion stops because of 



202 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

unapplied soul power, that particular thought force stops 
and is no more. 

If a thought is to be reproduced in the near future, 
the same processes must be set in operation in order to 
think the same thought over again, provided the tiny 
nerve connection with that particular group of brain cells 
still exists; if disconnection has taken place by reason 
of non-usage or infrequent repetition, that particular 
thought — vibratory cellular activity — stored in that group 
of brain cells has become lost to our memory; in such a 
case by the very effort of trying to remember the for- 
gotten thought a new nerve fibre shoots out to connect 
with the isolated group of brain cells wanted, and as soon 
as connection is reestablished we again remember and 
can reproduce our former thought. We shall deal with 
this subject more fully in the second octave, where we 
will discuss thought force and its relation to mental 
therapeutics. 

In later years it has become fashionable for investi- 
gators of psychic phenomena to charge up to telepathy 
any and all kinds of phenomena that could not be readily 
explained from a materialistic viewpoint, thus making 
telepathy the burden bearer of materialistic ignorance 
until she became indeed a pitiful sight to behold, with 
all kinds of legitimate and illegitimate children clinging 
to the skirts of the once upon a time beautiful and attract- 
ive maiden courted by ancient sages and philosophers 
as a goddess with god-like attributes, sitting upon the 
great white throne in the midst of human consciousness. 

We have said, that all psychical as well as physical 
phenomena result from a blending of harmoniously re- 



Telepathy 203 

lated primary forces and elements, governed by immu- 
table cosmic laws. This axiomatic truth, when applied 
to the phenomenon called telepathy, would mean that 
the law that governs the processes by which this pheno- 
menon is produced is the same that governs all other 
psychic processes, and we have conclusively shown that 
harmony is the law that governs all psychic processes. 

In connection with the above reasoning, if we take 
another step along the line of analysis from cause to 
effect, we will find that telepathy is simply a hypnotic 
phenomenon involving primarily the physical sense of 
feeling. In other words, the phenomenon called telepathy 
is produced and obtained only by hypnotic processes; 
and as the student reader is now familiar with our new 
explanation of hypnotic processes, it will be very easy to 
understand and properly apply this knowledge to the 
subject in hand. 

Telepathy is a phenomenon akin to inspiration. 
Telepathy, Inspiration and Hypnotism can not exist 
without at least two participants, — the operator and the 
subject, the inspirer and the inspired, the sender and the 
percipient. 

We have said that telepathy is primarily an experi- 
ence involving the physical sense of feeling, but the sub- 
sequent effect under hypnotic processes may involve 
all the five physical senses, causing the subject (although 
far away from the operator) to see, hear, smell, taste 
and feel, and even think according to mental suggestions 
given by the operator — said to project thought force 
from a positive to a negative brain. 

This so-called thought transference is really the 



204 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

implantation of an idea in the mind of the receptive sub- 
ject by mental suggestions transmitted under hypnotic 
influence from the operator to the subject, who will 
at once formulate this idea into thought words and 
action precisely in the same way as if he had evolved 
the idea himself. 

In other words, the sensitive subject at the negative 
pole, when the hypnotic process has reached the 60% 
to 65% point, all other conditions being favorable, will, 
the moment the suggested idea is instilled in his mind, 
commence to think the same thoughts as the operator 
was or is thinking when suggesting the idea to his reci- 
pient subject. 

It should always be remembered that ideas originate 
in the human soul, and constitute what is called intuitive 
knowledge (to know without any reasoning process); 
but when an idea is instilled in the mind from an outside 
source by mental or oral suggestions under hypnotic 
influence, it becomes and really is borrowed knowledge, 
as exemplified in inspiration. 

Telepathy, meaning "the feeling or experience of a 
sensation from another person at a distance," which 
mean nothing else than feeling the sensation of electro- 
magnetic impulses projected from another person at a 
distance, the sensation felt is the same as is felt by the 
subject when personally present and contact is made by 
"laying on of hands," resembling somewhat sensations 
produced by a mild electric current. 

But someone might say : Is it really possible for one 
person to project these electro-magnetic impulses to an- 
other person at a distance? 



Telepathy 205 

We have in various ways at different times shown 
how the electro-magnetic forces in nature are continually 
flashing from pole to pole, from suns to planets, from 
planet to planet, from cloud to cloud, from magnetized 
steel to a soft piece of iron, from one magnetized sheet 
of paper of a certain rate of vibratory force to another 
electrified sheet of paper, with a harmonious rate of 
vibratory force, all for the (sole) purpose of establishing 
and maintaining equilibrium and balance between the 
positive and negative forces in nature, by this interchange- 
able blending process. 

This interchange or blending of the vital-electro- 
magnetic forces of any two or more human beings, takes 
place at all times, when sufficiently near one another; 
the degree always corresponding to each one's relative 
location on the scale of vibration; but never exceeding 
the 50% point, except when forced to do so by the 
dynamic power of the human soul. 

It is by and through this power, inherent in the hu- 
man soul operating through the attribute of desire and 
the faculties of will and mind, that these forces become 
agents of expression and impression; it is by the same 
soul power that these same forces may, on the wings of 
thought, be projected or sent to a recipient party at 
a distance, when the necessary conditions are present 
and the required opportunity given. These conditions 
and requirements are the same as exacted for hypnotic 
experiments and need not here be repeated. 

The blending process in telepathy must by the oper- 
ator be forced above the 50% point in order to obtain 
results ; upon this depends the degree — by virtue of this 



206 Psycko-Harmonial Philosophy 

blending process — to which the operator gains control 
of the subject's mind, and under such control instills the 
suggested idea which will be formulated into the same 
thought as embodied in the suggestion by reason of the 
fact that the operator has control of the subject's mind 
action, formulating the thoughts, hence the resulting 
thoughts can not be different from the thoughts embod- 
ied in the suggested idea. 

This explanation is as close to the true facts as lan- 
guage will permit, and clear enough for all to understand ; 
but if any one in ignorance, actuated by prejudice, refuses 
to understand we, of course, can not compel such a one 
to accept the truth. 

The blending process in telepathy (that is at a distance) 
can be more readily accomplished if a transmission of 
vital, electro-magnetic force has first been initiated by 
personal contact, and especially so if this has been done 
for the purpose of facilitating the projection of these 
forces to the subject when at a distance, for in so doing 
the blending process, effected by personal contact, is not 
abrogated but remains in force, and the process can again 
be taken up and continued, regardless of distance separ- 
ating the two participants. This explains the mooted 
question of post hypnotic suggestions in hypnotism — 
but very often telepathic phenomena may be produced 
without preceding personal contact, when conditions are 
favorable. 

We at one time, by projection of these forces, initiated 
a blending process with an entire stranger at a distance 
of 1500 miles, and had remarkable results, both telepath- 



Telepathy 207 

ically and otherwise. (This will be explained more fully 
in the 3d volume.) 

In wireless telegraphy we have a similar projection 
of the electric force as a radiation from the metallic 
point of delivery. This radiation is equally distributed 
all around to a distance commensurate with the power in 
the dynamo. In telepathic experiments the vital electro- 
magnetic forces are projected in a straight line from the 
operator (positive pole) to the receptive subject (nega- 
tive pole). 

This has been ascertained by the fact that a sensitive 
subject, in front of the operator at a distance to whom 
the projected forces are directed, will receive the impulses, 
whereas another sensitive subject behind the operator 
will not feel these impulses at all; if the two subjects 
change positions the same result is obtained. 

However, we must here make due allowance for 
suggestive effects on the two subjects, hence these ex- 
periments require various diversified demonstrations 
in order to become corroborative evidence upon which 
truth may be established. 

Now we must take a more extended view of telepathy 
and examine the possibility of an invisible spirit being 
operating conjunctively at the very side of the subject, 
or as a third party on the higher octave become a 
dominant factor in the trinal blending process, and as 
such, make the experiment successful which otherwise 
would have been a failure. 

It is a fact, although not accepted by the world's 
wise ones, that spirit beings have a great deal more to 
do with telepathic phenomena than is generally supposed. 



208 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

The advanced student, who has learned that hypnotic 
processes and control can be initiated by spirit beings, 
can now without any difficulty understand how a spirit be- 
ing, invisible to physical sight, could by hypnotic processes 
and control of the subject's mind produce the telepathic 
phenomenon just at the time two physical beings were 
undertaking the experiment. The idea embodied in the 
message to be sent could easily be instilled into the mind 
of the subject by the operating spirit — a process similar 
to inspiration — while the two physical participants being 
entirely ignorant of this fact would naturally think they 
had accomplished a successful experiment in telepathy.* 

In one of our own experiments, we once asked the 
spirit operator as to which end of the invisible (wireless) 
line he was operating from, and this was his answer: 
"/ am all the way along the line." This answer when 
truly interpreted means that he was the dominant factor 
in the transaction. 

The trinal blending process in such a case can best oe 
understood when illustrated by the major chord of C, 
E, G. The spirit on G, the dominant factor; the physical 
operator on E, the mediant position ; the subject on C, 
the keynote or tonic. 

How easy and logical it is to in this way explain 
telepathic messages s apposed to come from a near rela- 
tive who suddenly suffered death from accident of some 
kind, thousands of miles away. Such a message might 



*To support this claim we will cite the reader to an experiment re- 
cently conducted in New York City, in which a telepathic message in 
the English language was received in Latin by the recipient party in 
London; neither one of the participant parties having any knowledge 
of Latin. 



Telepathy 209 

consist of a repetition of a spoken word at the time of 
death, in which the voice of the diseased may be closely 
imitated. It might consist of a clairvoyant vision in 
which all the details of the accident could be vividly 
suggested — in waking state or dream state. 

And furthermore in support of this claim, can it not 
be logically supposed that at the very moment of death 
the newborn soul, finding itself subject to new conditions 
and environments, would be unable to produce such 
telepathic phenomena as ofttimes reported? It would be 
just as logical to expect a newly born baby to report 
the event of its birth to a distant father. 

Another more curious result may take place when 
a spirit operator has two subjects on the telepathic 
string ; in such a case the two subjects may have an inter- 
changeable dream vision, in which both parties would 
see, hear, and feel as if they were actually personally 
present to one another; this may take place in such a 
way as to cause each one of the two parties to positively 
declare that they were wide awake at the time of the tele- 
pathic experience — for remember, that in the same way 
as the spirit operator suggests things seen or heard in a 
dream vision, can he also suggest to a sleeping subject 
that he is wide awake, hence would have the same sensa- 
tion as if he was awake; in other words, when asleep 
a person may dream of being wide awake. 

It is not within our province to mention all the differ- 
ent phenomena ascribed to telepathy, and it is not at all 
necessary; for our explanation will explain all of them 
in such a logical manner, that the phenomena simply 



210 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

become effects produced by natural causes, all gov- 
erned by the universal law of harmony. 

Before closing this chapter it will perhaps be necessary 
to say something about telepathy said to have occurred 
between man and the higher animals. 

By reason of the fact that animals have exhibited 
the so-called spiritual sense faculties of clairvoyance and 
clairaudience, it has been assumed that they are capable 
of exercising supernormal psychic perceptions; and even 
to be endowed with special psychic powers unknown to 
man ; as for instance the so-called instinct of direction and 
migration, which also enables them to foresee storms, 
earthquakes and other natural phenomena; this can be 
easily explained when we know the primary causes 
producing these phenomena and the nature of the domi- 
nant forces, and their relation to the same forces in the 
animal; for instance, that which intensifies the rheuma- 
tic pains and all other nerve diseases in man to such a 
marked degree, just before a storm approaches, will also 
cause a cold shivering sensation down the spinal column 
of a hog, which will cause the hog to prepare a warm lair, 
where it may take refuge during the passage of the storm. 

That animals are subject to hypnotic processes, when 
favorable conditions exist, is well known to all students 
familiar with this subject — and why not? 

When applying our explanation of the hypnotic pro- 
cesses, it may be clearly seen that animals are amenable 
to hypnotic influences just as well as man — and if a man 
can hypnotize an animal when favorable conditions exist, 
why should not a spirit being be able to do the very 
same thing, and by that method let the animal know of 



Telepathy 211 

its presence; or by the same processes at a distance pro- 
duce so-called telepathic phenomena, for the sole purpose 
of trying to convince a skeptic physical brother that a 
spirit brother is actually present and desires to communi- 
cate. And such facts should not be attributed to hallu- 
cination or imagination of the human brain, for does not 
the animal perceive the same things? 

In connection herewith, it would be well to remember 
that animal soul with its attributes and faculties of 
expression and impression is the same as the human soul 
with its more highly developed attributes and higher 
faculties of expression and impression, and that the 
difference is only in degree of unfoldment or attainment ; 
hence in the higher animals we find, in a lower degree, 
all the human characteristics exhibited to a marked 
degree. 

This subject will be taken up again in the second 
octave, where we will endeavor to explain how animals are 
healed in the same way, and by the same processes, as 
human beings are healed. 

* 'Across the world I speak to thee, 

Whether in yonder star thou be," 
Or in a nearer zone to me 
Upon this earthly plane, we see. 



m 



CHAPTER XI 

Chromatic Scale of A Sharp 

Z ■ S »— m " F^ — & — £=£=£: 



-* — ? — % 



i 



MATERIALIZATION AND DEMATERIALIZATION 

The thoughtful reader and advanced student, who has 
carefully followed our line of arguments as presented 
in the preceding chapters, will have no difficulty to 
understand and realize the truth of our new explanation 
of spirit materialization, the most wonderful of all the 
various phenomena, especially so because a successful 
manifestation of spirit power, involving most delicate 
chemical processes, must necessarily require conditions 
of the most exact nature. 

This new explanation, based upon the musical scale 
and supported by all the arguments so far presented in 
the preceding chapters, will become another link welded 
into the chain of Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy that will 
reveal the scintillating truth radiating from the mighty 
star of harmony, the brightest and the most conspicuous 
in the constellation — harmony, love and wisdom, the grand 
major chord on the macrocosmic scale of cause and effect. 

Materialize, according to Webster's definition, is : "To 

212 



o 

f- 
< 

N 
_J 
< 

u 
h 
< 
2 









s 














o> 














9 




:A 




% 




o 




Co 
Cb 


cc 




■'* 


^k 






o 


4- ° 


A 












\* u. 


4/ 










^s^ 


- \ \ Ll - 










LJ 




^ \ \ ^ 


Oj M 








> 




^H ^\ \ h- 


° m 

f> 2460 728 OB 








? 








CO 
UJ 

O 


^ 1 








u 








ooo 09-Km 








o 




m II ^ 














ml / / / <^> 
ML lu 

f / / / o 


% 






y°^ 








°*r z ; 

2 - 



2762 



o^ 



38? 



^-z 



0gg '9Z63**O 

FIELD C l 



•Z0£ 



*<>■ 



^ 



Materialization and Dematerialization 2 1 3 

reduce to a state of matter," and we take it for granted 
that the meaning he intends to convey is, that an invisible 
substance of high vibratory rate of atomic activity is 
reduced or lowered to that rate of vibration exhibited 
in tangible material objects, which are visible to our 
sense of sight, by the responsive capacity of our visual 
organs. 

Our readers will especially remember this fact: To 
materialize is to reduce or lower atomic vibration of 
an invisible ethereal substance, which under the law of 
transmutation and concomitant processes of condensa- 
tion is transferred from the invisible to the visible realm 
of nature, where it may become sufficiently solidified to 
be visible to our physical sense of sight. 

The term '•reduce," according to the dictionary means: 
"To bring back to a former state" — we should also note 
the close relation existing between the terms reduce, con- 
dense, and contract. 

The investigator of psychic phenomena, and especially 
materialization, should not bank too much on his or her 
own experience even under the closest observation. For 
under the present system practiced by many materializ- 
ing mediums, advertising themselves to be able to pro- 
duce this marvelous phenomenon under almost any kind 
of condition, before a promiscuous audience, one or 
more times daily, the investigators invariably find them- 
selves up against powers and forces which render it 
impossible to at all times be absolutely sure that they see 
the object which they think they see. This refers espe- 
cially to the question of identification. 



214 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

An explanation of the above statement will neces- 
sarily be in order and we give the following : 

If the investigator, or the chronic phenomena hunter 
should happen to attend a fake materializing seance, 
given under supposed test conditions, a human form 
may appear in front of the cabinet, which the credulous 
investigator supposes to be a materialized spirit body 
of some deceased relative; and for the purpose of more 
fully convincing the sitter of this fact, the investigator 
is called up to the cabinet for a closer inspection, that 
the materialized spirit may be identified; and here is 
where the invisible powers and forces are set in operation, 
augmented by the contact of hands by the investigator, 
and the manager of the circle, which if the investigator 
should happen to be a sensitive, results in immediate 
hypnotization ; for which the party in question has 
already been prepared while sitting in the circle. 

If the hypnotic processes have reached the 60 or 
65 per cent point, the investigating subject will at once 
recognize that form to be father, mother or uncle, as 
the case may be, without question or doubt, for it was 
perhaps light enough to observe certain marks or other 
characteristics of the form which would furnish unmistak- 
able evidence of identification; and such self-experience 
is of course accepted to be the best evidence and positive 
proof of the phenomenon called materialization. If the 
critical observer is able to distinguish the sensitive per- 
son from the non-sensitive, he will discover that the non- 
sensitive, when confronting a supposed spirit mother or 
sister in front of the cabinet, is never able to recognize 
them even in the best light allowed — the psychological 



Materialization and Dematerialization 2 1 5 

wind is blowing in the wrong direction, consequently 
unfavorable for hypnotization — the blending process is 
similar to blending oil and water. 

And then again such observer would notice another 
fact. A large percentage of spiritualists, when called 
up to the cabinet, will in most cases identify the supposed 
materialized spirit form as the one it represents itself 
to be, for spiritualists as a rule are more or less sensitive 
and amenable to hypnotic influence. 

In connection herewith it is hardly necessary to state 
that the supposed materialized spirit form seen at such 
seances that some would recognize as a departed loved 
one, and others would not, was nothing more or less 
than the medium's physical form dressed up in wig and 
"toggery" to resemble the one the sitter would most 
likely want to see. 

This attempted personation and masquerading person- 
ality may be done while the medium is in the unconscious 
trance state and knows nothing about what is being done; 
and again the medium may do these things intentionally 
for the purpose of getting the dollar per head admission ; 
but in such a case the deceiver should not be called a 
medium, but simply a fake or impostor. 

In the other case we have certainly witnessed medium- 
istic processes, and most assuredly experienced spirit 
presence, yet under a cloud of deception. 

We have personally had the best kind of manifesta- 
tions of spirit intelligence when we at the very same time 
knew that we saw only the medium's form slightly dis- 
figured by robes and other ' 'toggery" used for no other 
purpose than deception; consciously supplied by the 



216 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

medium, for that purpose, who hence becomes a party 
to the deception and should be held responsible to that 
extent. 

The honest, keen observer may be satisfied with the 
result as far as the demonstration of the presence of spirit 
intelligence was concerned, but the money paid for 
admission to a highly advertised materializing seance, 
where only personation was given, could not be con- 
strued to be anything but money obtained under false 
pretense. 

If a medium can not produce the genuine phenomenon 
of materialization, let such a medium be honest and 
pull down the flagrant materialization sign, nor in any 
other way intimate that materialization would be given, 
but instead let the patrons know that personation would 
be given, with necessary auxiliaries, and there would be 
no need of any ropes, stitching, or flour and beans. 

Yet it might be said that such a medium sometimes 
gives genuine materialization, and does not in any way 
guarantee what will be given, and therefore should not 
be held responsible if only personation should be proven 
to be given; — this is a lame excuse, for the medium surely 
knows, or at least should know, that genuine full form 
materialization in such promiscuous circles as a rule is 
almost an impossibility, and should not be expected. 

The main object in this chapter is to explain the true 
processes by which full form materialization may be pro- 
duced, when circles are formed in accordance with Nature's 
laws and principles, as exemplified in the musical scale. 

All nature is established upon a musical basis, hence 



Materialization and Dematerialization 217 

all phenomena become explainable from the basis of 
the musical scale. 

All psychical as well as physical phenomena result 
from a BLENDING OF HARMONIOUS RELATED 
PRIMARY FORCES AND ELEMENTS; this blending 
always takes place to the same degree that harmony 
exists. Harmony, then, is the great law that governs 
all manifestations ; hence it follows that a materializing 
seance must be conducted along the line of harmony in 
order to obtain the best result. 

Every human being is at all times subject to musical 
laws and has a certain location on the musical scale 
according to inherently related electric and magnetic 
forces, which as positive and negative elements constitute 
factors which determine a person's location on the scale 
of vibration. It is this location on the musical scale 
that constitutes a person's keynote, which explains the 
very processes and dominant factors in individual exist- 
ence. This will be clearly explained in the third volume. 

By the thirteen chromatic notes on the scale, we have 
thirteen different human characteristics and tempera- 
ments represented. Each note represents the result of 
a certain number of vibrations per second; see colored 
plate No. 7. 

Each and every person has a vibratory multiple 
relation to one of these thirteen notes on the scale, which 
constitutes that person's individual keynote. 

We may divide every half step of the scale in four 
parts and thus have forty-eight different temperaments 
represented. We may make a more sweeping division 
and have two hundred and fifty-eight different temper- 



218 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

aments to deal with, and even go into the hairsplitting 
business and deal with fractions, which produces that 
infinite variation under which no two human beings 
are ever born just alike ; but we shall here only deal with 
the original thirteen human temperaments according to 
their location on the chromatic scale, which explains the 
secrets oi inherent basic principles of existence. 

According to the statements in the "New Testament" 
Jesus must have understood and practiced this system 
when he went about over the country picking up his 
disciples here and there as he found them corresponding 
to the twelve chromatic notes on the scale, He himself 
being located on F sharp, the vital center, a position 
only held by a perfect human being, and is called the 
messianic point, with John on G, and James on F, which 
are the prophetic points; Peter on high C, with Judas on 
low C, these two points being the most positive and 
negative constitute the two extremities of the scale. 

"The twelve in awful circle stand 
Where mortal dare not enter; 
And blazing like a solar world 
Stands Jesus in the center." 

In Mark ix, 2, we read: "That Jesus took Peter, 
James and John up into an high mountain, apart by 
themselves where he was transfigured before them." 

The phenomena of etherealization and materializa- 
tion were produced so that the physical form and raiments 
of Jesus exhibited transcendental radio-activity, and 
Moses and Elias could be seen talking with Jesus. The 



Materialization and Dematerialization 219 

question which demands a scientific as well as a logical 
answer is this: Why did Jesus take Peter, James and 
John from out of the twelve disciples up into the moun- 
tain? (presumably a cave "into" the mountain) or in 
other words: Why were Peter, James and John neces- 
sary for the production of the phenomena of etherealiza- 
tion and materialization ? The answer is this : By virtue 
of their individual location on the musical scale, Peter 
on high C, James on F, and John on G, they constituted 
representatively the initial notes of the three major chords 
on the natural key of C, on which He (Jesus) had organ- 
ized his chromatic circle, which gives Jesus the focal 
point on F sharp. This combination of the three major 
chords in the natural key of C, constitutes a perfect vital 
electro-magnetic battery necessary for the production of 
the above named phenomena, provided, however, that 
all other conditions are favorable. 

This realistic fact may be demonstrated on any of 
the twelve musical scales, but the degree of the phenomena 
decreases from 10 to 40 per cent from the key of C sharp 
up to key of F and increases at the same ratio from key of 
G up to key of B, by virtue of the various degrees of 
electro-magnetic balance existing on the different keys 
upon which a chromatic circle may be organized. 

The above facts as recorded by Mark, when fully 
understood, are positive proof that Jesus or some one 
else directing him had a practical knowledge of PSYCHO- 
HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY, and the cosmic law of 
harmony. 

The three grand divisions of the human family repre- 
sented by the sanguine, motive and phlegmatic tempera- 



220 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

ments, have their relative positions on the musical scale, 
and are classified as electric, magnetic, and electro-mag- 
netic temperaments, each one with sign board aloft 
designating its proper location on the scale of vibration. 

Judas no doubt was as necessary in the organization 
of that great chromatic battery as low C is to the musical 
scale, and with Judas at one extremity of the scale necessi- 
tated the call for Peter to take the opposite extremity, 
that electro-magnetic balance and equilibrium might be 
obtained. 

Jesus evidently knew what Judas represented when he 
said (John vi, 70): "Have not I chosen you twelve, and 
one of you is a devil." In the next verse it says that 
"He spoke of Judas the son of Simon." Judas being a 
representative of the lowest human characteristics, must 
of course have the position of low C on the musical scale 
as well as on the scale of human attainment on the scale 
of morality. The central idea here, is that on the scale 
of attainment the process of development must com- 
mence on low C, hence low C is as necessary as high C, 
which becomes the low C in the next octave above, 
and the low C is the high C in the next octave below; 
this is the law of harmonial, evolutionary progressive 
reproduction from octave to octave, on the macrocos- 
mic scale as well as the microcosmic scale of vibrations. 

"And I will give unto thee [Peter] the keys of the 
kingdom of heaven: and whatsoever thou shalt bind on 
earth shall be bound in heaven: and whatsoever thou 
shalt loose on earth shall be loosed in heaven." Matthew 
xvi, 19. This key was the knowledge of the hypnotic 



Materialization and Dematerialization 22 1 

powers possessed by Peter. (Key is always a symbol of 
knowledge.) 

It might legitimately be asked: Why was not this 
knowledge given to John or James, the two most beloved ? 
Here is the answer: Peter by birth under favorable 
planetary influences was a natural born hypnotist, which 
gives him the location on high C, and of course was the 
only one of the twelve most naturally adapted to use the 
hypnotic powers which he possessed in the greatest meas- 
ure. It is true that by the mesmeric powers greater 
things may be accomplished along certain lines; but re- 
member that Jesus occupied the mesmeric or messianic 
point on F sharp, hence, John and James were half a 
step removed from the point that could be expected to 
equal Peter in natural abilities. Now we must understand 
that a natural born mesmerist is always located on or 
between F and F sharp, and on or between F sharp and 
G; and a natural born hypnotist is always located on 
or between B and high C, and on or between low C and 
C sharp. 

Judas possessed the hypnotic power in as great a 
measure as Peter, but this key could not be given to him, 
for he would never have the opportunity to use this 
knowledge for the good of humanity, and if he ever did 
use these inborn powers, he would be most likely to use 
them for evil purposes, hence it was best that Judas 
never knew his powers. 

It will now not be difficult for the thoughtful reader 
to understand the ancient terms, "White magic" (mesmeric 
processes)^ "Black magic' ' (hypnotic processes). This 



222 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

subject will be more fully explained in the second octave, 
where it really belongs. 

But some will say that Jesus was only a mythical 
character, representing certain ethical and moral princi- 
ples. Very well if you want it that way, you only trans- 
fer the knowledge of these facts to the one or ones 
who wrote the Gospels; the proposition is just as broad 
as it is long ; the facts are there just the same, although 
enveloped in a cloud of mysticism. 

We will here introduce a spirit message which is pur- 
ported to have come from a Hindu philosopher who 
claims to have lived many years ago in India. In this 
message he refers to Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy as a 
system known and practiced by the ancient Hindus. 
He says: "This system was taught and practiced in India 
long before the Christian era; and my successors taught 
this system to Jesus when he was in that country seeking 
knowledge; but Jesus, having the Jewish religion to deal 
with, modified and mystified their teachings, thinking 
thereby to be better able to amalgamate this system 
with the doctrine of the Jews; no doubt actuated by a 
desire for notoriety as a teacher among his countrymen." 

Now we have learned that each and every person, as 
an individual being, has a certain vibratory multiple 
relation to some note on the chromatic scale, which in 
this way will represent all the different human character- 
istics and temperaments of all nations. 

This system of forming circles according to nature's 
laws embodied in the principle of music, was exempli- 
fied in ancient astrology by the great circle comprising 
the twelve zodiacal signs with the earth in the center — 



Materialization and Dematerialization 223 

Geocentric. The reason why the ancient astrologers 
adapted the geocentric system of astrology is based 
upon the fact that our solar system is constructed and 
organized on the key of E, which gives the earth (with 
its location on B flat) the central focal point on the scale 
of E. 

In modern times we look upon the evolutionary sweeps 
of the constellations along the path of the zodiacal circle 
to be the grand 25,000 years cycle, in which our own 
solar system has its appointed place. 

These same principles were represented in the Jewish 
mythology by the twelve sons of Jacob, six on each side, 
afterwards the twelve tribes of Israel. 

When forming a materializing circle according to this 
system, each and every one of the twelve sitters should 
be carefully selected according to his or her multiple 
relation to each note on the chromatic scale upon which 
the circle is organized, and hold the position of that note in 
the circle, which is formed by joining together the two ex- 
tremities with high and low C as a neutral point, and open 
the circle at F sharp with a medium on the focal point F 
sharp ; that will fill the requirements of a sensitive instru- 
ment, with a perfect individual electro-magnetic balance, 
and correspondingly developed Soul powers to insure a per- 
fect vitalization process. Such a medium would constitute 
a natural focal point for the concentration and focalization 
of all the forces in the circle to be subsequently metamor- 
phosed into power. 

A circle so formed will indeed be a veritable human 
horseshoe magnet on the physical plane, with the medium 
in the electro-magnetic field between the positive and 



224 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

negative poles indicated by G and F on the colored plate 
No. 7. 

The flow of the vital electro-magnetic force from the 
neutral point at the junction of low and high C along 
both arms of the circle will be concentrated and polarized 
in the medium at the focal point F sharp, and the un- 
vitalized magnetic force — represented by the blue color — 
issuing from the positive pole, and the unvitalized elec- 
tric force — represented by the red color on plate 7 — 
issuing from the negative pole, will reach the medium 
in a perfectly balanced condition, ready for the blending 
and vitalization process to be accomplished at the vital 
center on F sharp.* 

This homocentric blending of all the forces in the 
circle is by a skillful spirit operator (cabinet chemist) 
metamorphosed into power to be used in the work of 
lowering and reducing a high rate of vibratory ethereal 
atomic motion to the prevailing rate of atomic and mole- 
cular activity in tangible material objects, which our 
physical organs of vision may readily respond to, by 
virtue of the laws governing reflection of light, which 
vibratory activity is by the optic nerve system trans- 
mitted to the brain, where the human mind receives these 
vibratory cipher messages and transmits the interpre- 
tations to the realm of consciousness, where the human 
soul-entity sees the object that has in the materializing 
seance been "reduced to a former state of matter." 

Let us here introduce as evidence a statement from 
Prof. M. Faraday, the eminent and well known English 

*The peculiar relation existing between F sharp and all the other 
notes on the scale will be considered and fully explained in the third 
octave. 



Materialization and Dematerialization 225 

electrician now in spirit life, from whence he says : "The 
spiritual body consists of the same elements as the physical 
body, and only differs in atomic rates of vibrations." 
Having in a short way explained the formation of the 
human horse-shoe chromatic battery on a certain level 
or key — the natural scale of C — on the physical plane, 
it also becomes necessary to explain the spirit horse-shoe 
chromatic battery organized on the same plan and gov- 
erned by the same law of harmony inherent in the musical 
scale, on one or more octaves higher up on the scale of 
vibration, yet on the same keynote. 

Each individual spirit, forming the spiritual chroma- 
tic circle or battery, is selected according to multiple 
relation to the note on the chromatic scale to be occupied, 
on the octave or level upon which the organization is 
effected; with the spirit medium on the focal point F 
sharp. This spirit medium on F sharp necessarily must 
be in perfect multiple harmonial relation to the physical 
medium on F sharp on the lower octave, — which by 
virtue of the law of harmony insures a perfect blending 
process in which the two mediums become as one in polar- 
ity. This homocentric blending can best be exemplified 
by striking F sharp on any two octaves of a piano. 

This blending of the two mediums on F sharp (see 
colored plate No. 7) constitutes the focal point for the 
concentrated forces of the two batteries, the visible and 
invisible circles ; and just as modulation in music is the 
bridge upon which higher and lower sound vibrations 
meet in harmony, so is mediumship the bridge upon 
which the positive and negative forces and elements 
meet in polarity. 
15 



226 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

At this point of the processes, the desired result de- 
pends largely upon the skill and knowledge of the spirit 
chemist or operator manipulating the power, resulting 
from blending and concentration of primary forces and 
elements from the two circles. 

This power we have computed from actual measure- 
ment's of the emanations from each individual comprising 
the circle on the lower octave (4th octave) and by math- 
ematical processes obtained the measurement of each 
individual on the invisible circle on the third octave higher 
up (7th octave), and the result represents a lifting power 
of 2,000 to 3,000 pounds in one hour; that is, the energy 
and power generated and expended in one hour would 
equal the power necessary to lift from 2,000 to 3,000 
pounds. This of course varies according to the level 
or octaves upon which the two circles are organized. 
This is the same power that is manifested when the arm 
is raised by muscular contraction, which is the result of 
concentrated vital electro-magnetic force, converted into 
muscular power, through the avenue of expression — 
understand that the vital electro-magnetic force is both 
vital force and a motive power at the same time. 

Now each member of the two circles being at their 
post on their respective notes on the chromatic scale, 
with the two mediums blended at the focal point F sharp, 
the vital electro-magnetic forces will, lightning-like, flash 
along lines of least resistance from each member of 
the two circles to the focal point of concentration on F 
sharp, where it is converted into power to be manipulated 
by the skillful spirit chemist. 

A spirit being who desires to be materialized and for 



Materialization and Demaierialization 227 

a few moments at least become visible to earth friends, 
steps into the electro-magnetic field of the human horse- 
shoe magnet (see plate No. 7) where the reduction pro- 
cess — the process of "bringing back to a former state of 
matter" — is»made to play upon the ethereal spirit form, 
and the lowering of the high rate of vibration of ethereal 
substance culminates in condensation under the law of 
transmutation, and that invisible ethereal substance is 
"reduced or brought back to a former state of matter" 
in a few moments of time, and is now ready for the aug- 
mentory or finishing-up process, which for the want 
of a better name we will call electro-magnetic atomic 
plating or tegumentation — a process similar to your 
commercial electric silver or gold plating. 

This is the process by which, under the law of trans- 
mutation, matter is converted into its correlated force at 
the positive pole and by the electro-magnetic currents 
transferred to the negative pole where it is re-converted 
into its "former state of matter," thus forming a verit- 
able shell of solid matter on that part of the spirit body 
whose vibrations had been "reduced to a former state of 
matter." 

These processes may be applied to any part or to the 
whole spirit organism. Spirit clothing and all things of 
a spiritual nature can by these processes be "reduced to 
former states of matter," for the time being; and the 
length of time it will hold intact under red or orange 
colored light or twilight depends upon the thickness of 
the electro-magnetic atomic plating. A thick piece of 
ice will hold a solid form longer under an application of 
heat than a thin piece will. 



228 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

Heat and light are manifestations of certain rates 
of motion ; the white light from the sun with its vibratory 
multiple relation to high C on the scale, affects a material- 
ized form just as a correspondingly high degree of heat 
would affect a thin piece of ice, which would melt in- 
stantly and be converted into vapor, and at last disappear 
entirely under continued application of heat. 

But the slow-going motion of light, from radiating 
red color vibrations on low C or orange on D, has a lesser 
effect on newly reduced matter with texture superfine 
and colors far surpassing any of our chemical pigments, 
being more like rainbow tints or the colors exhibited in 
a newly opened rosebud. The white seems to be whiter 
than newfallen snow — purity of matter determines the 
purity of radiated color vibrations. 

Now we will make the prediction and assert advisedly 
that when materializing circles are formed and conducted 
according to the plan here outlined, it will become possible 
for human beings on the earth plane to walk and talk 
with angels and gods at high noon, and entertain such 
visitors from the higher realms; not unawares under 
cover of darkness, but under full light, will we meet spirit 
friends face to face. 

Now, suppose a physical human being should desire 
to dematerialize, and "be an angel and with the angels 
stand" for a few minutes at least, the modus operandi 
would be for a human sensitive to take a position in the 
electro-magnetic field of the spirit horse-shoe magnet 
(see colored plate No. 7) where the spirit operator could 
manipulate the same powers, with a reversal of the pro- 
cesses, and in a twinkling of an eye almost, the physical 



Materialization and Dematerializatio n 229 

atomic and molecular activity would be increased to the 
vibratory rate of spirit substance, and the subject would 
no longer be visible to physical sight; and as a visitor 
from the physical realm of nature in turn be entertained 
by loving angel friends, manifesting life on the higher 
octaves of existence. 

But our dematerialized friend is just like a fish out of 
water, and can not long endure the high vibratory force 
tension, and must quickly return to the realm of existence 
where nature has provided harmonial vibratory force 
relations, adapted to physical conditions, hence our 
homesick would-be-angel at once takes a position in the 
electro-magnetic field of the human horse-shoe magnet, 
and by a reversal of the processes our inquisitive friend is 
again returned to a former normal state of matter, wiser 
but perhaps not happier. 

A person used to dreaming while in the waking state, 
may here have the opportunity of dreaming of future 
possibilities for the physical human being, when these 
chromatic circles would be established in all the large 
cities for public use — just like wireless telegraph stations 
are now established — where a person could find the nec- 
essary facilities for being switched from the physical 
realm to the ethereal realm of existence and for a few 
minutes travel with lightning speed, propelled by the 
dynamic power of the human soul through the faculty 
of the will and mind, directed by desire to reach a certain 
locality; there to be switched back into the physical 
realm, transact all necessary business, then again appear 
at the transmutation station, touch the electro-magnetic 
button on the switch board and again assume the ethereal 



230 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

form, and on the wings of thought return home to be 
metamorphosed back into the physical realm again; all 
requiring less than 10 minutes' time — would this not 
solve the transportation problem? 

In connection with the above explanation of dema- 
terialization, the progressive student should have no 
difficulty in explaining the marvelous phenomenon of 
passing matter through matter. 

Now a thoughtful reader will no doubt tacitly admit 
that these processes may be observed all around us in 
nature when an invisible substance under the law of 
transmutation becomes visible, tangible matter, which 
is the result of the manipulation of the vital electro- 
magnetic force by a soul-entity, striving to construct a 
physical structure for the purpose of manifesting as life 
on the great highway of progressive unfoldment with 
its cyclic spirals, leading from octave to octave, to ul- 
timate realms of infinitude. 

This process of growth under nature's normal condi- 
tions is slow but more lasting; and the manifesting entity 
need not be afraid of being light (ning) struck at every 
critical point of the road and seemingly dashed into 
nothingness in the twinkling of an eye. 

Now we are well aware of the fact that a large majority 
of people living today, do not accept these facts as true. 

ist. Because they have never seen a genuine mani- 
festation of spirit power. 

2nd. Because they have never studied the laws that 
govern such manifestations. 

Would a scientist living in equatorial regions deny 
the fact that vapor, under favorable conditions, is re- 



Materialization and Dematerialization 23 1 

duced to a former state of crystalization, and falls from 
the clouds in the form of snow flakes; or that water 
congeals into a solid state under a certain degree of cold 
— because he has never seen it? No, he has studied and 
understands the law that governs these things just as 
well as his brother scientist in a northern latitude where 
such phenomena frequently occur. 

In concluding this chapter, we shall kindly advise 
all thoughtful readers to study the law that governs 
the processes involved in the phenomenon called mater- 
ialization, and become competent to judge between the 
false and the true, and be able to distinguish the differ- 
ence between an arisen brother or sister, and a scarecrow. 

MATERIALIZATION 

Is Nature's changing mood, divine, 

It appears in the flowers, blue, 
That growing slowly, may define, 

The starry dome, in color, true. 
Obscured is all the stellar world, 

When sunshine turns the dark to light. 
So Nature's plans are not unfurled, 

For all to note, by day or night. 

We feel the soothing spell at eve, 

Of dew, invisible, that soon, 
Above, below, may make believe, 

The earth's a fairy realm, in tune, 
With music of the spheres of light. 

And everywhere, the law obtains, 
In growing forms of changing might, — 

As vapors, mists, and heavy rains. 



232 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

Those passed beyond this earthly stage 

As spirits, may employ the law, 
To materialize the form, 

And prove that love will always draw, 
Our own to us, in sunshine, storm. 

To earth a mission they may owe, 
In lieu of what she did for them, — 

For everywhere, we, each, will grow, 
Through doing love deeds, that begem, — 

As materializations. 

— Lisle E. Saxton. 



cvAR OMAT,C c, 






PLANETS 






ZODIACAL 


SIGNS 


(? 


MOON 


»? 


SATURN 


X 


PISCES 


tttj VIRGO 





VULCAN 


© 


C.ELESTIA 




AQUARIUS 


<> LEO 


V 


MERCURY 


V±7 


NEPTUNE 


Y? 


CAPRICORNUS 


5~0 CANCER 


rt» 


MARS 


•,• 


ASTEROIDS 


x^ 


SAGITTARIUS 


II GEMINI 


<¥ 


JUPITER 


© 


EARTH 


tn 


SCORPIO 


^ TAURUS 


*3 


URANUS 


9 


VENUS 


=£= 


LIBRA 


GY3 ARIES 



CHAPTER XII 



i 



CHROMATIC SCALE OF B 



■& 59- 



fa ffo fj l 



£=3» 



1 



wm 



* * 



THE CHROMATIC CIRCLE 



Does God geometrize? is the question asked by the 
author of "Arabula" when he was sitting on the bank 
of a stream in Texas, examining the petals of a certain 
flower. 

In this chapter we shall endeavor to show that nature's 
laws are grounded on geometry, that the universal plan 
of world building is in perfect conformity to geometry 
and mathematics — that the masonic emblems, the square, 
triangle, compasses and plumb line, go hand in hand 
with geometry, mathematics and music. The square, 
triangle and compasses are geometrical figures founded 
upon musical laws, and inasmuch as nature is estab- 
lished upon a musical basis, these masonic emblems 
become symbolical expressions of nature's laws. 

Music, geometry, and mathematics are most beauti- 
fully expressed in the great major chord, — harmony, 
love and wisdom. 

Some philosoohical thinkers hold that love is the 

233 



234 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

greatest of all things that exist, and even go so far as to 
refer to Divine love just as if the finite understanding 
of man could know and describe Divine or infinite love. 

When we go deeper into this subject and critically 
analyze it, we find that love is co-existent with harmony, 
but cannot be manifested until harmony first creates 
the requisite conditions. The manifestation of love is 
conditional; hence love is manifestly largely dependent 
upon harmony for necessary conditions; yet does exist 
as an attribute of the human soul — and if the human 
soul has always existed, love has also always existed; 
and we shall look upon harmony and love as twin brother 
and sister; and if they did not always exist, harmony must 
have been the first born, thus making conditions for the 
birth of its twin sister, love. 

The geometrical rectangular triangle in free-masonry 
has a true relation to the musical triad or the major chord 
on any of the twelve chromatic scales — the masonic 
compasses have a true relation to any and all the relative 
minor chords in all the different keys — and when the 
square and compasses are placed properly upon the 
geometrical altar of harmony the square points out all 
the major chords and the compasses points out all the 
relative minor chords. See diagram No. 8. 

"He took the golden compasses prepared, 
In God's eternal stores, to circumscribe 
This universe and all created things." 

—Milton. 

Modulation in music is the plumb line that swings 
from discord into harmony, oscillating back and forth 



The Chromatic Circle 235 

from key to key, seeking the point of equilibrium where 
harmony and discord may blend in homocentric polarity. 

The twelve keys in music are the twelve branches of 
the tree of harmony on which the twelve notes are "the 
twelve manner of fruits;" having a perfect relation and 
correspondency to the tree of life. By the tree of life 
is meant all living organic beings, each and all having 
their respective location on the musical scale, upon which 
"the twelve manners of fruit" is the ripened product, 
manifested in the twelve human temperaments and 
characteristics according to the human being's location on 
the musical scale, which is the keynote involving the 
fundamental principle of individual existence. 

These twelve human temperaments are the direct 
result of vibratory laws governing the relation existing 
between the electric and magnetic forces, which again 
result in a perfect or imperfect vitalization process, bring- 
ing into existence a perfect or imperfect product (vitality) 
as one of their twelve manners of fruits on the tree of life, 
"whose leaves shall be for the healing of all the nations." 

The mathematical and geometrical ratio of progressive 
unfoldment along the line of expansion — all the way from 
the first triune combination in the first protoplasmic 
cell through the three physical kingdoms, culminating 
in man, the apex of the physical pyramid of perfection, 
the ripened fruit of this wonderful tree of life — is beyond 
the comprehension of finite mind. 

It has long been known and verified by experimenta- 
tion that when sound vibrations are directed against a 
parchment stretched over a hoop, iron filings or fine 
sand sprinkled thereupon will form themselves into 



236 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

geometrical figures in accordance with the sound or chord 
that is played. Each musical sound and the various 
combinations of sounds are capable of expressing them- 
selves in geometrical forms and colors. 

If we now remember how the geometrical figures in 
the human aura appeared as a representative of the 
individual emotional feelings expressed in thought, we 
may clearly see the correspondency existing between 
thought force and vibratory sound waves; the former 
having a perfect multiple relation to the latter. 

C. W. Leadbeater describes musical form expression 
as follows: 

"Music may be enjoyed by the clairvoyant sense of 
sight as well as by the sense of hearing, for these musical 
form pictures are most striking, and of infinite variety — 
each class of music has its own type of form, and the 
style of the composer is as clearly shown in the form 
which his music builds as a man's character is shown in 
his handwriting; other possibilities of variations are 
introduced by the kind of instrument upon which the 
music is performed, and also by the merits of the player. 

"The same piece of music if played accurately will 
always build the same structure, but the form will be 
enormously larger when it is played upon a large church 
organ than when it is performed upon a piano, and not 
only the size but also the texture of the resultant form 
will be quite different. 

"Thus a Wagner, Mendelssohn and Beethoven and 
other masters built musical ethereal edifices of different 
types according to their emotional feelings and power of 



The Chromatic Circle 237 

decision, whose scintillations of resplendent radiance are 
beyond the power of words to describe." 

In building these beautiful ethereal temples of vibra- 
tory elements the astro-masonic architect must have 
tools that are in corresponding harmony to the material 
he is shaping into form, which are all represented in our 
geometrical diagram called "The Chromatic Circle." 

When studying this diagram the reader will clearly 
see that geometry, mathematics, music, the zodiacal 
signs, the square, the triangle, the compasses and the 
plumb line are all revolving around a common center; 
therefore homocentric, exhibiting a most perfect har- 
monial relation. 

Music in its most perfect expression is a revelation of 
all mysteries in nature. Science in its keener analysis 
shows that everything in nature is established upon a 
musical basis. Vibrations and rythmical pulsations are 
the raw material of music. Music may be defined to be 
rythmical vibratory sound waves having a sympathetic 
relation to the emotional feelings of the human soul — 
"but no definition has ever compassed the whole scope 
and meaning of music. Each new definition serves to 
make clear some particular phase of it. Everything in 
nature trembles in response to musical pulsations.' ' 

In the old mythology of the poetic Greeks, who were 
so responsive to nature's influences, the sun was person- 
ified as Apollo the God of Music, as well as dispenser of 
light and life to all; his direct descendant, ASCULAPIUS, 
the great healer, is said to have caused the very trees to 
dance to his music ; — does not the wooden frame of the 
piano vibrate and dance to the music of the strings? 



238 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

"But it is one thing for the tissues of our being to be 
acted upon like the sounding board of a piano, and quite 
another thing to sense the music — one is passive, the 
other active — the former is common to all ; the degree in 
which we exercise the latter will be proportioned to our 
musical development. Growth in music is partly emo- 
tional, partly intellectual. On the one hand, there comes 
a fuller feeling of the tone-beauty; on the other hand, 
a growing perception of the harmonious relations of the 
musical structure, and these two are so intimately blended 
that it is impossible to separate them, or to assign to 
each its proper share of the sense of pleasure and inspira- 
tion which is excited in the listener's mind." 

Huxley says: "If the human ear was sufficiently 
developed we could hear the music of the blooming 
flowers." 

If our ears could respond to all of nature's music, 
everything around us would become a wonderful orchestra 
of melodious expressions of soul. 

All art music is suggested by, derived from, and 
unerringly governed by nature — the source of all melody 
and harmony. 

"Discord in music does not mean confusion and 
antagonism." 

1 'There is just one proposition on which the whole 
science of music is based, or in which it has its foundation; 
that is, a chromatic scale of twelve notes, beginning with 
one having any number of vibrations per second and 
continuing in regular arithmetical progression with each 
ascending tone until the last or twelfth tone has reached 
vibrations just double that of the tone of the beginning. 



The Chromatic Circle 239 

This scale exists in nature. It is not man-created, man 
has simply discovered the laws of its existence. 

"Dissonance has its place in musical harmony, as 
it has its place in all nature; it is the condiment to har- 
mony, which gives zest to the musical appetite. The 
distribution of a given amount of dissonance exist- 
ing between the two C's on the middle octave must be 
done according to a law that is empirical in its demand, 
and the perfection of this distribution to the various 
notes depends upon how near the law that governs has 
been approached. 

"Taking International pitch as a basis, and beginning 
with middle C, which has a vibration of 258.652 per 
second, the vibration of the other eleven tones of a per- 
fect chromatic scale may be found by using 94.3874 as a 
ratio divisor. The dividend in the first division would be 
the known vibrations of middle C, 258.652; the quotient 
as a result would be C sharp, 274.033; next, 274.033 
would be the dividend, the divisor remaining the same, 
the quotient would be D, 290.328, and soon throughout 
the scale until C an octave above is reached, which if 
no mistakes have been made, will vibrate twice the C 
we began with, or 517.304. See plate No. 7. 

"In carrying out these deductions we have here lopped 
off all decimals beyond three places, but the scale is the 
result of carrying them much further." 

The twelve notes on the chromatic scale when bent 
in the form of a circle is called the chromatic circle, 
which corresponds to the zodiacal circle of twelve signs 
in the heavens. Each half step on the scale represents one 



240 Psycko-Harmonial Philosophy 

of the zodiacal signs, which have their location on the 
chromatic scale as follows: 

Commencing with Pices on the low C, we go up the 
scale with Aquarius on C sharp, Capricornus on D, 
Sagittarius on D sharp, Scorpio on E, Libra on F, Virgo on 
F sharp — the vital center — Leo on G, Cancer on G sharp, 
Gemeni on A, Taurus on A sharp, Aries on B. See dia- 
gram No. 8. 

Again we locate the planets of our Solar system on the 
chromatic scale according to their inherent predominant 
electric and magnetic quality and quantity which de- 
termines their positive and negative nature; and the 
vibratory frequency of predominant forces, as follows :* 

Commencing with the sun on high C, we descend the 
scale with Venus on B, Earth on B flat, the five largest 
pieces of a former planet with orbits in the meteoric belt 
between Mars and Jupiter on A, Neptune on G sharp, 
Celestia on G, Saturn on F sharp, Uranus on F, Jupiter 
on E, Mars on E flat, Mercury on D, Vulcan on C sharp. 
The earth's moon being the most negative planet from 



*From Clarence E. Gauss, United States Deputy Consul at 
Shanghai, we have the following authentic record of music in China. 
x 'The Chinese claim for their music the greatest antiquity. According 
to their annals musical characters were invented by the Emperor 
Fushi, some 3,000 years before the Christian era; which under the 
Emperior Huangti, 2700 B. C, was greatly improved and became one 
of the arts, whose laws became well understood. Certain notes were 
chosen as keynotes, the sounds were fixed and received names, com- 
parisons WERE DRAWN BETWEEN THE NOTES AND THE CELESTIAL 

bodies (planets of our solar system) of the universe, and music 

BECAME A NECESSITY IN THE STATE, A KEY TO GOOD GOVERNMENT. 

"After Huangti, his successors took a great pride in practicing 
music and composing hymns, and the post of music master was con- 
sidered the most dignified office in the empire. 

"Confucius spoke of music in the highest terms of sincere admira- 
tion, and recommended it as the best medium for governing and guid- 
ing the passions of men." 



The Chromatic Circle 241 

a geocentric astrological viewpoint will consequently 
have its position on low C. See diagram No. 8 and 
especial colored plate No. 10 in the second volume. 

To prove that the above location of the planets of 
our solar system on the musical scale is true, apply 
this test: Take all the electrical planets with their 
moons, and ascertain the weight of each one, then ascer- 
tain the total number of tons. Then add up the tonnage 
of all the magnetic planets and their moons, and the 
results will nearly balance. If comets belonging to this 
system could all be figured in, the electro-magnetic rela- 
tion would show a perfect balance. 

When placing the solar family on the scale, we follow 
the same rule as laid down for locating the human family 
on the scale; and inasmuch as Saturn is the most perfect 
planet in our solar system, embodying the noble attribute 
of love and religious principles, his location as a savior of 
the solar family must be on the messianic point, which is 
the location of the saviors of the human family. This is 
the vital center where perfect balance between the elec- 
tric and magnetic forces exist, there being perfect 
equilibrium, perfect harmony, providing all other condi- 
tions are favorable. We will here quote what Prof. H. 
E. Butler, author of Solar Biology, says of this noble 
planet : 

"During my investigation into the nature and quality 
of Saturn, I became convinced that it was the grandest 
and most perfect planet in our solar system, and that 
its rings were spirit zones luminous with Divine life, 
having come into perfect harmony with the same. Its 
function has to do with the scientific and religious 



242 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

principles which it embodies, and expresses in a degree 
far in excess of our present intellectual ability to com- 
prehend. In fact it can never be expressed by any one 
individual on this planet/ ' 

It will not here be deemed visionary to assert that 
by reason of this harmonious relation of the electric and 
magnetic forces, especially attained by the Saturnian 
system at the time when the present existing rings formed, 
there could be no disruption, no friction in the perfect 
harmonial balance, hence the rings remained encircling 
the planet just as we see them today. 

The planets that come next in order of perfect physical 
and spiritual development are: Celestia (outside the 
orbit of Neptune), and Uranus, whose attributes and 
character corresponds to the disciples John and James. 
The other planets follow in degree as we ascend and 
descend the scale from the vital center on F sharp. 

It is said that there is always a black sheep in every 
family, perhaps there may also be a black sheep in the 
solar family; if so, it must be Vulcan. The very name 
would indicate volcanic disruption and destruction, 
but evolutionary processes will no doubt in course of time 
change the black fleecy garment into raiment as white 
as snow by virtue of the emanating love principle of 
Saturn, the savior of the solar family, and the prodigal 
will become harmoniously related to the whole family. 

The thoughtful reader should here go back and re- 
study our new philosophy of light and heat, which makes 
it possible for any and all the different planets of our solar 
system to enjoy its blessing in a measure depending 
upon the density of their surrounding atmosphere; and 



The Chromatic Circle 243 

then be able to have a true comprehension of our solar 
family. See Chap. VIII, page 54. 

The Sun on high C is the great electro-magnetic 
battery which once contained and embraced the whole 
solar family; and just as the high C contains vibratorily 
all the notes on the scale, the sun contains all the elements 
existing in the solar system. It is the all in all — exemplified 
in the rays of white light which contains all the colors 
of the spectrum — -and is all in all, in the field of colors. 

Note — This subject will be continued in the third 
volume under the caption: Astro-Masonic Chromatic 
Circle. 

"As pure, white light through colored glass 
Truth glimmers through the soul, 
And gives a glimpse of broken parts, 
Of one grand perfect whole. " 

"All matter is God's tongue, 
And from its motion God's thought is sung. 
The realms of space are the octave bars, 
And the music notes are the sun and stars." 

"All are but parts of one stupendous whole 
Whose body Nature is and God the soul." 

"The stars that high in heaven their courses run 
In glory differ, but their light is one." 

"A spiral winds from the world to the sun, 
And every star that shines 
In the path of degrees forever runs, 
And the spiral octave climbs." 



m 



CHAPTER XIII 



Chromatic Scale of C 



£& fZ — S*_ 



tp^H^ ^^^ I 



RECAPITULATION 

This last chapter in the first octave will be dedicated 
to high C. And in the same way as white in its multiple 
relation to high C contains all the colors exhibited in the 
spectrum, does high C contain all the vibrations of the 
lower notes of the scale, and becomes the bridge or 
connecting link between two octaves. 

It is from this elevated high C bridge we propose to 
take a sweeping retrospective view of some of the most 
important subjects so far considered, and again by wa}^ 
of application reproduce some of the major chords in the 
various keys of PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY, 
that their re-echo in the memory of our students' con- 
sciousness will prepare them for the new teachings in 
the second octave, where we are going to sing a new 
song, a gospel hymn of health, happiness and success, 
in all the various keys of PSYCHO-HARMONIAL 
THERAPY. 

In the first octave we have built a basement or lower 
story upon the most solid foundation extant; this struc- 

244 



Recapitulation 245 

ture will be continued in the second and third octaves, 
under the harmonial law of progressive reproduction, until 
we have the most beautiful temple of wisdom where all 
may come and worship the god of eternal truth and listen 
to the teachings of Psycho-Harmonia! Therapy, the true 
doctrine of healing, resting upon the solid foundation of 
the musical scale — Nature. 

We have so far built a structure that can not be 
undermined, for its foundation corner stone is moored 
on the bed-rock of nature; the superstructure, Psycho- 
Harmonial Therapy — the gem in the crown of the 
twentieth century healing systems — will firmly stand 
against all storms that are somewhat tempered with 
common sense and reason; we want no arguments with 
people that do not accept facts in nature as evidence, 
claiming such positive evidence to be only mortal errors. 
We do not expect to convince the selfconceited know-all, 
for such conviction would be against his will, hence would 
in no way change his former opinions. Truth cannot 
be forced upon anybody, but can only be obtained by 
the most diligent and persistent search and research, 
well set forth in the exclamation of the poet when he 
says — "O, truth of the eternal! O, truth of things! 
I am determined to press my way toward you. Sound 
your voice ! I scale mountains, or dive in the sea after 
you." 

In our retrospective view of cosmic knowledge 
and wisdom — bounded by the horizon of the dim past at 
the very dawn of the morning when the first electro- 
magnetic impulses projected from the chromatic battery 
on the octave of the gods, causing the vortex of inflowing 



246 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

energy to be the central nucleus of the homocentric nebu- 
lous formation which under the law of condensation and 
transmutation, augmented by evolutionary processes, 
resulted in the formation of our present solar system 
with planets and their attendant satellites which measure 
the segments of siderial time and mark the boundary 
line of the horizon of the present, yet always subject to 
change in the future as well as during the past — we find 
that the noon hour is the climax of perfection of morning 
and evening. 

Sometime, somewhere, along the line of evolutionary 
unfoldment of this solar system of ours, it must as a 
whole reach the climax of perfection at its noon hour, 
and ultimately morning, noon and evening will complete 
the one grand day of its cyclic existence, and dissolution 
and disintegration will be ushered in, that all material 
elements may be resolved back into their primates — 
the ethereal atom — ready to be used again in the construc- 
tion of other solar systems much better than the old one, 
for the law of evolution is operative even on the octaves 
of the gods — "a new earth and a new heaven," etc. — a 
promise in which the term heaven would naturally in- 
dicate our solar system. 

THE WATCH OF THE GODS 

"The melancholy of a driven leaf, 

The patient journey of a long dead world ; 
These are alike, when gods with steady eyes 
Look down upon a universe unfurled. 

"They see the silt and scum of what has been, 
The death in ice that was a birth in fire, 



Recapitulation 247 

Old forests mute with snow that shall not melt; 
A world long done with sorrow and desire. 

"And, you that sigh to see a green leaf brown, 
E'en so, perhaps, the gods with steady eyes, 
Who watch dead worlds like autum leaves go by 
Along the drift of gray eternities." 
— Georgia Wood Pangbom in Appleton's Booklover's 
Magazine. 

In our retrospect we want to call the reader's attention 
to those fundamental facts in nature, which are conspicu- 
ously pointing out the road leading to the central foun- 
tain head of truth; from which rivers and brooklets 
flow along the valley of inspiration into the open sea of 
soul-entities where it may blend with the soul's man- 
ifestation as life in all the different keynotes of individual 
existence, interblended with flats and sharps according to 
the law of harmony governing the various keys ; in other 
words, the level upon which a certain degree of develop- 
ment has been attained. 

In the first chapter, dedicated to the natural key of 
C, we learned that all phenomena result from homo- 
centric blending of HARMONIOUSLY RELATED 
PRIMARY FORCES AND ELEMENTS, and that these 
primates were not created, but always did exist. 

That this blending process can only take place under 
certain harmonious relations between force and sub- 
stances or between the factors forming the major chord 
of a triune combination — we learned that this blending 
process was the initiative in the formation or construction 
of our solar system. 



248 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

We have also clearly shown how the manifestation 
of soul as life-motion was first originated by the same 
blending process of the primary factors forming the 
triune combination in the first protoplasmic cell under 
the law of involution; and that the dominant factor, 
the soul principle, initiated the life-motion, setting up 
evolutionary movement along the line of expansion. 

Also has it been clearly shown how the soul-entity 
has by involutionary and evolutionary processes advanced 
from the lowest stage of existence along the cyclic spirals 
of progressive unfoldment, from octave to octave, all the 
way through the three kingdoms in the physical realm 
of existence, erroneously called the manifestation of God 
in nature. 

We have followed the soul-entity through the spiritual 
realm, and ultimately through the soul realm or zones 
of archangels; we have attended the soul's initiation 
into the octave of the gods, when it entered the Elohimian 
state and became as one of the gods, "knowing good and 
evil." 

We want the thoughtful reader especially to remember 
the paradoxical fact that all combinations resulting in 
form without a soul-entity as a dominant factor, all 
evolutionary processes tending toward perfection, are 
always along the line of contraction, and that the motion 
exhibited is simply force motion; but when a soul- 
entity is incorporated in the combination, the involution- 
ary and evolutionary processes tending toward perfection 
of form and inherent psychic qualities are always along 
the line of expansion, and the motion exhibited is the 
manifestation of the soul as life-motion. 



Recapitulation 249 

The psychic reader should study and verify this 
fundamental fact in nature, and have one of the strongest 
proofs of the existence of soul and its inherent power of 
manifesting as life in the physical realm of existence. 

Again a very prominent land mark, within the horizon 
of human knowledge, is fully considered in the sixth chapter 
and demands special attention so the thoughtful reader 
will have a clear comprehension of the true classification 
of powers and forces operating in the invisible realm of 
the human being. When studying psychic processes, much 
depends upon a true knowledge of the faculties or avenues 
of expression and impression ; if a false conception should 
govern the investigator, false conclusions will be the result, 
and discord and trouble will appear all the way along 
the line. 

This is the reason why so many different opinions are 
held by students having a false conception of the human 
being, consequently they do not always know where 
they are "at." 

A student of Psycho -Harmonial Philosophy should 
at all times, under all kinds of circumstances, with the 
musical scale as an unerring compass, know just exactly 
where he is "at;" if at any time a fog bank should be 
encountered, stop and go back to first principles as 
pointed out by the musical scale as clearly as the needle 
of the mariner's compass points out the magnetic (posi- 
tive) north pole; then when you have the true direction, 
do not hesitate to advance upon the fog bank of fallacy 
and error and plant the rainbowhued standard of Psycho - 
Harmonial Philosophy in the very midst of falsehood 
without fear of molestation or successful contradiction, 



250 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

for it is firmly secured on the solid rock foundation of 
nature. 

The three grand divisions of existence should appeal 
to your reason as logical because of the superabundance 
of correspondency throughout all nature, and is just 
like coming events casting their shadow before them. 

The physical, spiritual and soul realm of existence 
are related to one another just like C, E, G on three 
successive octaves, where the dominant, mediant and 
tonic expressions form the grand major chord of existence. 

In a more extended consideration of eternal pro- 
gressive individual existence, we may conceive of three 
other divisional octaves or realms of infinitude, where 
evolutionary laws as we find them operative on the 
octave of the gods are manifestly in evidence. 

In a geometrical sense, all the six grand divisions 
of existence may be likened to a cube which with its six 
square sides represents all that exists. The three highest 
and the three lowest cubical squares represent the grand 
major and relative minor chords of eternal individual 
existence. If it were possible to extend our research 
into the infinite realms of the sixth cubical square we 
would no doubt find the universal infinite everflowing 
soul fountain, from which Emerson says "all things 
proceed." But it is useless for the finite to grapple 
with things infinite. We shall not attempt to describe 
that which is indescribable, but only refer to these things 
as possible correspondencies. 

The various keynotes or tonics on their respective 
scales in each and every octave, are the different levels, 
higher or lower pitch, in which the same harmonial pro- 



Recapitulation 25 1 

gressive reproduction of major and minor chords appear 
successively in regular order, may to some extent assist 
the fearless seeker after truth to peer into the higher 
realms of existence and form a true conception of things 
unlawful for us to mention. , 

If any of the subjects so far dealt with should be of 
more importance than any other in preparing the stu- 
dent for the teachings in the second and third octaves, 
it is mesmerism and hypnotism. 

We have already given this subject more considera- 
tion than any other because it concerns powers and 
forces inherently operative in the human being, which 
must be clearly and fully understood if a true knowledge 
of the subject of healing is to be obtained. 

In the first octave we have ised die generally accepted 
term hypnotism exclusively, because we have only been 
dealing with common ordinary phenomena, which are 
just exactly alike whether produced by hypnotic or 
mesmeric processes. But when we come to consider the 
phenomena of healing in the second and third octaves, the 
differentiation of the processes becomes more apparent, 
and under close analysis demands separate classification. 

When we take up the consideration of these two 
processes, we shall in connection therewith analytically 
consider ' 'suggestion" with reference to its therapeutic 
value as a healing agent, and we shah try to make it plain 
to our readers what suggestion really is and what it is 
not when considered from a therapeutic standpoint. 

When dealing with the great subject of healing, we 
shall not like our predecessors ask our student readers 
to believe this, that, or the other simply because it is based 



252 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

upon some accepted authority, or because a majority of 
people at this or any other time believed it to be true, 
for it is possible that the great majority may believe a 
rank falsehood to be true as gospel. 

We shall in all cases furnish sufficient proof and evi- 
dence to establish the truth we proclaim; the nature of 
these proofs will be positive, logical, analytical, and an 
honest appeal to common sense and reason. If we can 
succeed in clearing away the cumbersome barnacles of 
superstition and mysticism clinging to the subject of 
healing, and explain the healing processes more clearly and 
scientifically than any other system can or ever has done, 
then we shall feel that PSYCHO-HARMONIAL THER- 
APY, as set forth in the second octave, should be duly 
considered, accepted and appreciated by our student 
readers. 

And when we in the second and third octaves proclaim 
the gospel of health as taught in Psycho-Harmonial 
Therapy and prove the aphorism, That no more shall 
the human race be destroyed by disease, we shall feel 
that we have done our duty to mankind in making possi- 
ble that harmonious relation between man and nature 
under which no disease can exist. 

To this end and with that aim in view we dedicate 
the second octave of this work, hoping our readers will 
patiently follow our line of argument to the final con- 
clusion. 

Emerson says: "If the right theory shall ever be 
proclaimed we shall know it by this token : It will solve 
many riddles." 

While yet standing on the overarching high C bridge, 
clearly observing the shore-banks of the two octaves 



Recapitulation 253 

with their intervening space, we feel that we can not 
finish this last chapter in the first octave without point- 
ing out to the reader the grand and wonderful major 
chord, expressed in the colored plates Nos. i, 3, and 5. 

No. 1. The Tonic (the initiative). 

No. 3. The Mediant. 

No. 5. The Dominant, 
showing that man — the human soul-entity — is des- 
tined to hold dominion over all powers and forces 
operating in this majestic grand major chord; and 
ultimately become the dominant factor in world-building. 

"Get but the truth once uttered and 'tis like 
A star new-bom, that drops into its place, 
And which once circling in the placid round, 
Not all the units of the earth can shake." 

RECAPITULATION 

On the heights of achievement we stand, 

And look back o'er the changing way. 
There are places of effort, that demand, 

Tests of strength, that prepared the way 
For the now. There are vales of ease, we see, 

Touched by shadows, at times, then bright 
With the soul-shine that lingers, that will be, 

To the marsh-states a kiss of light. 

All the failures, successes, we've won, 

All we gained on the upward way, 
Were suggestions, were aids, and have done 

Well their work, and without delay. 
On these heights, we'll sum them all up, 

And will trust in the pow'r, we feel, 
That has grown, as we quaffed from the cup, 

Which experiences reveal. 



254 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

EXPLANATION 

By THE AUTHOR AND THE SCRIBE 

The author of this work fully recognizes the disad- 
vantages under which it has been prepared for publica- 
tion, yet the scribe knowing the limited opportunities 
which have been his, feels that he has perhaps builded 
better than he knew; hence launches this work upon the 
sea of literature with the confident assurance that much 
good will accrue to all who peruse its pages. 

The thoughtful reader will no doubt ask the old, old 
question: By what authority, or whence this new 
-system of philosophy and co-related therapy that seems 
to be so logically constructed upon a most solid founda- 
tion? The intelligent reader should have no difficulty 
in answering this question, partly from the way the sub- 
ject matter has been discussed and partly by being 
familiar with, and having a clear comprehension of, the 
law governing inspiration. 

The writer holds, that it is not so much the question 
of who the original author may be, as it is the more 
vitally important query of whether the statements given 
in this work are true or false. 

The "Thus saith the Lord" proposition with refer- 
ence to authority, has in these latter days of scientific 
research been relegated back to the ancient mythological 
scrap-pile by all intelligent investigators. 

It really makes no difference who originated the ideas 
clothed in language by the writer, for they must stand or 
fall on their own merits. 

The mountain stream can not rise above the level 



Explanation 255 

of its source. The intrinsic value of a literary production 
can not by borrowed authority be raised above the level 
of the writer's own capacity, which always must corre- 
spond to the development of soul power and concomitant 
faculties of expression and impression. An effect always 
predicts its cause, inasmuch as it partakes of the nature 
of the cause producing it. 

In these days of inquiry and honest research, we 
should pay less attention to supposed authority, for 
although accepted as true, it may be false more or less,, 
and instead endeavor to obtain the real thing — pure and 
unadulterated wisdom fresh from the mills of the gods. 

It is not so much the question of what people think 
of this work, but what it really in itself is ; the former is 
merely reputation — supposed authority — the latter is its 
own individual intrinsic value. We have no excuse to 
offer, in the shape of a traditional long felt want, for giving 
PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOP HY and co-related 
THERAPY to the world . We stand confessedly guilty be- 
fore the judgment bar of literary jurisprudence, complac- 
ently awaiting the verdict fom the impartial judge — the 
higher criticism. If this verdict should be unfavorable 
or adverse to the doctrine we have promulgated, because 
of insufficient evidence produced in the first and second 
trial (ist and 2d Octaves) we still have the prerogative 
of appeal to the higher court, where evidences will be 
introduced that could not and should not be introduced 
in the lower courts, for various reasons best understood 
by the higher tribunal. 

Before this court of eternal justice, with greatest con- 
fidence in its fair and unbiased judgment, we shall plead 



256 Psycho-Harmonial Philosophy 

our case and introduce overwhelming, unimpeachable 
evidence, gathered from center to circumference of the 
visible and invisible universe, which comprises its juris- 
diction so there will be no doubt about the final decision 
being rendered in our favor. 

The court record bearing stenographic transcription 
of the evidences introduced, and our plea for justice 
before the higher tribunal, will be given in the third octave, 
contained in the third volume, entitled THE LOST 
CHORD AND LOST WORD REVEALED. 

A careful study of the forthcoming third volume will 
enable the advanced student to make a practical appli- 
cation of the teachings promulgated in the first and 
second volumes. 

In connection with the third volume will be issued 
a separate mechanical harmonial device, a new invention, 
by which it is possible for any of our readers to ascertain 
their harmonial or discordant force relation to another 
human being, and all other things in nature, even when 
they are not familiar with music or musical laws, for the 
only thing required is to touch a button and the mechan- 
ical device does the rest. 

If you want to know the exact degree of harmonial 
or discordant relation existing between you and another 
human being or anything else in nature, first locate 
yourself and the other party, or thing, on the musical 
scale as per instructions given in the tonic chord in the 
third octave, then turn the knob until your keynote 
appears in the prescribed opening, and the masonic 
emblems — the square and compasses — correctly placed 
upon the geometrical altar of harmony according to musi- 



Explanation 257 

cal and mathematical laws will point out the degree of 
harmonial or discordant force relation existing between 
you and the other party, whether it is of a major or minor 
chord, of a dominant, mediant or tonic nature. 

Apply this to colors as they are located on the scale 
on plate No. 4, and correctly ascertain whether a given 
color is harmonious or discordant to your personality. 

In astrology it gives a true knowledge of the har- 
monious and discordant force relation existing between 
you and any of the planetary influences of our solar 
system. 

This device is as infallible as the musical law itself, 
and is an objective demonstration of the law of vibra- 
tion, just as 2x2=4 is an objective demonstration of the 
law of mathematics. 

This device is so simple in construction that a child 
10 years old can in 10 minutes learn to operate it, and be 
able to show all the different major and minor chords 
in the various musical keys, and all the sharps and flats 
belonging to each respective key. 

This device holds in nut-shell proportions all the 
knowledge pertaining to musical laws of harmony and 
discord, and is beautifully illustrated in twelve colors 
in the third volume with other interesting diagrams 
dealing with esoteric selfknowledge especially intended 
for the advanced student. 

ETERNAL FITNESS OF THINGS 
"That holds each product to its work, 
Distends, contracts, renews, 
Chains with magnetic forces grand, 
And lights by secret fuse." 

— M. A. Congdon. 



INDEX 

AND 

DESCRIPTIVE PRICE LIST 

OF THE THREE VOLUMES 



259 



DESCRIPTIVE PRICE LIST 



FIRST OCTAVE 

ENTITLED 

PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY 

Contains 13 chapters as follows: 
(Each chapter headed by its respective chromatic scale) 

Presentation. (Poem) Page V 

Introduction. Page VII 

Chapter I. COSMOGONY (Key of C natural) 
Explaining the process involved in the con- 
struction of our solar system. Page 13 

Chapter II. SPIRIT AND MATTER or FORCE 
AND SUBSTANCE (Key of C sharp) 
Life-motion and force-motion considered in 
relation to the phenomena of expansion and 
contraction. Page 25 

Chapter III. INVOLUTION AND EVOLUTION 

(Key of D) 
The great factors in the Divine drama of 
eternal existence. Page 33 

Chapter IV. SOUL (Key of D sharp) 

The origin of the soul-entity and its progress- 
ive unfoldment from the first protoplasmic 
cell to THE ELOHIMIAN STATE. Page. . . 50 

Chapter V. SPIRIT (Key of E) 

One of the primary constituent factors in 
the triune combination called MAN. Page.. 61 

260 



Index 26 1 

Chapter VI. MAN (Key of F) 

The apex of the physical pyramid of forms. 
Page 71 

Chapter VII. AURA (Key of F sharp) 

The human aura on F sharp. Page 90 

Chapter VIII. MESMERISM AND HYPNOTISM 
(Key of G) 
A new definition and new explanation of mes- 
meric and hypnotic processes. Page 112 

Chapter IX. CLAIRVOYANCE, CLAIRAXJDI- 
ENCE AND PSYCHOMETRY 

(Key of G sharp) 
A new explanation of the processes involved 
in these phenomena. Page 165 

Chapter X. TELEPATHY (Key of A) 

THE LANGUAGE OF THE SOUL. Page.... 197 

Chapter XI. MATERIALIZATION AND DE- 
MATERIALIZATION (Key of A sharp) 
A new explanation of the processes involved in 
these most wonderful phenomena which constitute 
the gyroscopic balance wheel in organic and in- 
organic nature. Page 212 

Chapter XII. THE CHROMATIC CIRCLE (Key of B) 

Explanation of the harmonial relation existing 
between MUSIC, GEOMETRY and MATHE- 
MATICS, the planets and zodiacal signs. Page 233 

Chapter XIII. RECAPITULATION (Key of C) 

Are views of some of the major chords in the 
first octave with their scintillating truth in the 
great constellation of HARMONY, LOVE and 
WISDOM. Page 244 

Explanation. Why, how, and for what purpose this 
work was produced. Page 254 



Index of Colored Illustrations 

Plate I. OUR SOLAR SYSTEM (In 7 colors) 

Showing the zones of ARCHANGELS, sur- 
rounding the whole solar system. Page .... 11 

Plate II. EVOLUTION (In 7 colors) 

Illustrating the evolutionary path of progres- 
sive unfoldment of the soul-entity, from the 
first protoplasmic cell to the ELOHIMIAN 
STATE. Page 32 

Plate III. EARTH AND SPIRIT SPHERES 

(In 7 colors) 
Showing their multiple harmonial relation to 
the prismatic colors and the notes on the musical 
scale. Page , . 61 

Plate IV. MICROCOSMIC SCALE OF VIBRA- 
TION (In 7 colors) 

Giving a true classification of powers and forces 
operating in the invisible realm of the human 
being. Page 70 

Plate V. HUMAN AURA ON F SHARP 

(In 7 colors) 

A rainbow colored auric display of prismatic 
tints. Page 91 

Plate VI. RADIATING COLOR VIBRATIONS 

(In 7 colors) 
Showing that the blending of the three primary 
rays, Red, Yellow and Blue, produces the seven 
prismatic colors, and the blending of the seven 
prismatic rays resolves them back into the orig- 
inal white. Page 97 

262 



Index 263 

Plate VII. MATERIALIZATION (In 2 colors) 
Showing that the electro -magnetic balance in 
visible and invisible realms of nature is abso- 
lutely necessary for the production of psychical 
and physical phenomena. Page 212 

Plate VIII. THE CHROMATIC CIRCLE 

Depicting the harmonial relation between 
MUSIC, GEOMETRY and MATHEMATICS, 
planets and zodiacal signs. Page 233 

PRICE. Bound in silk cloth, elaborate gold stamp 
on front cover, halftone lithograph of author. Now for 
sale by the Harmonial Publishing Co., or the Author, 
P. Pearson, Ponca City, Okla., U. S. A., and the Pro- 
gressive Thinker, 106 Loomis St., Chicago, 111., and all 
booksellers. 

POSTPAID in the U. S. A.. $3.50 

Liberal discount to agents. 



SECOND OCTAVE 

ENTITLED 

PSYCHO-HARMONIAL THERAPY 

Containing 13 chapters as follows: 
(Each chapter headed by its respective chromatic scale) 

Presentation (Poem) Page 

Introduction Page 

Chapter I. HEALING (Key of C natural) 

Explains all the processes involved in the healing 
act. Page 

Chapter II. ETIOLOGY AND PATHOLOGY 

(Key of C sharp) 

Reveals the etiological factors constituting the 
first original cause of all pathological conditions. 
Page 

Chapter III. THE HEALER (Key of D) 

Explains what really constitutes the healing 
power. Page 

Chapter IV. THE PATIENT (Key of D sharp) 

The degree of harmonial relation existing 
between healer and patient always determines 
the degree of healing result. Page 

Chapter V. ELECTRO - MAGNETIC ENERGY 

(Key of E) 

Explains the constituent factors in the triune com- 
bination of forces, known as VITAL MOTIVE 
ENERGY. Page 

264 



Index 265 

Chapter VI. SUGGESTION (Key of F) 

Explains what suggestion really is and what it 
is not. Page 

Chapter VII. VITALIZATION (Key of F sharp) 
Reveals the psychic factor involved in the 
generation of the VITAL MOTIVE ENERGY 
throughout organic nature. Par 



(TO 



Chapter VIII. THE VITAL HEALING METHOD 
(Key of G) 
Here is explained the three processes, which 
conjointly and simultaneously produce the heal- 
ing result. Page 

Chapter IX. CIRCULATION (Key of G sharp) 

The two circulatory systems are the princi- 
pal factors in health and disease. Page 

Chapter X. THE SUGGESTIVE HEALING 
METHOD 

(Key of A) 
Deals with processes involved in suggestive 
Therapeutics. Page 

Chapter XI. TREATMENT (Key of A sharp) 

In which a scientific application of healing 
power is clearly defined. Page 

Chapter XII. DIAGNOSIS (Key of B) 

In this chapter is explained the psychic processes 
by which etiological factors constituting first 
original cause of disease are revealed to the 
healer. Page 



266 Index 

Chapter XIIL RETROSPECTION 

(Key of C natural) 
A review of some of the major chords in 
PSYCHO-HARMONIAL THERAPY. The 
20th Century healing system. Page 



Index of Colored Illustrations 

Plate IX. PSYCHO-HARMONIAL RAINBOW 

(In 13 colors) 
Showing degree of electro-magnetic relation on 
the various key notes on which human beings are 
located, and all nature responds to. When this 
rainbow appears in the cloud of darkness and 
ignorance, it will forever stand as a token of 
the promise given in the new covenant between 
man and nature. THAT NEVER AGAIN 
SHALL THE HUMAN FAMILY BE DE- 
STROYED BY DISEASE. Page 

Plate X. ASTRAL HARMONIES (In 2 colors) 

Showing the location of all the planets in our 
solar system, on the musical scale. Page 

Plate XL VITALIZATION (In 2 colors) 

Giving the fractional degree of VITAL MOTIVE 
ENERGY in every human being according to 
location on the musical scale. Page 

PRICE: Bound in silk cloth, elaborate gold stamp 
on front cover. Will soon be off the press. Postpaid 
in U. S. A., $3.50. 



THIRD OCTAVE 

ENTITLED 

THE LOST CHORD AND THE LOST WORD 
REVEALED 

Containing seven chords as follows: 

Introduction. Page 

L The Tonic Chord. SUPER-CHROMATIC 
SCALE 

Reveals a sure method of how to correctly 
locate all human beings, and all things in nature 
on the musical scale. Page . . 

II. The Super Tonic Chord. VITALIZATION 

A deeper study in the processes involved in the 
phenomenon of vitalization throughout the 
various realms in nature. Page 

III. The Mediant Chord. ASTRO - MASONIC 

CHROMATIC CIRCLE 

Explains how the masonic emblems when correct- 
ly placed on the geometrical altar of harmony 
reveal the LOST CHORD AND LOST WORD. 
Page 

IV. The Subdominant Chord. PHENOMENA 

Explaining the processes involved in the pro- 
duction of all psychical and physical phenomena. 
Page 

V. The Dominant Chord. HEALING 

A true explanation of the underlying healing 
principle evidenced in all healing systems. Page 

VI. The Submediant Chord. SPIRIT TELE- 
PHONE EXCHANGE 

A new method by which any one may converse 
with spirit beings in their own home, by proper 
telephone connection. Page 



267 



268 Index 

VII. The Subtonic Chord. APPLICATION 

A practical application and demonstration of 
fundamental principles set forth in PSYCHO- 
HARMONIAL PHILOSOPY and co-related 
THERAPY, in connection with the higher 
self knowledge obtained in the LOST 
CHORD AND LOST WORD REVEALED. 
PREDETERMINATION OF SEX, etc. Page 

Index of Colored Illustrations 

Plate XII. SQUARE AND COMPASSES 

These masonic emblems form the major and 
relative minor chords in all chromatic scales. 
Page 

Plate XIII. SPIRIT TELEPHONE EXCHANGE 

Showing how nature's laws based upon the musi- 
cal scale must be complied with in the seance 
room, if genuine phenomena are to be produced. 
Page 

Plate XIV. ATTAINMENT 

A comparison between BUDDHA'S noble 
eight-fold path leading to NIRVANA, and 
PSYCHO-HARMONIAL PHILOSOPHY'S 
progressive stages of attainment leading toward 
perfection. Page 

PRICE: Bound in silk cloth, elaborate gold stamp on 
front cover. Will soon be off the press. Postpaid in 
U. S. A., $3.50. 

Plate XV. MECHANICAL HARMONIAL DEVICE 

In the last part of the 3d volume is an illustration 
in 12 colors, a true facsimile of the mechanical 
HARMONIAL DEVICE. A mechanical appara- 
tus 8JxioJ which enables any person not famil- 



Index 269 

iar with musical laws, to ascertain the exact de- 
gree of harmonial or discordant relation existing 
between any two individuals, between a human 
being and any one of the planets in our solar 
system, and the harmonious or discordant re- 
lation between a human being and the food 
used for nourishment, all depending on their 
respective location on the musical scale. Page 

PRICE: Of MECHANICAL HARMONIAL DE- 
VICE, Postpaid in the U. S. A., $1.50. 

Send all orders to the author, P. Pearson, Ponca 
City, Oklahoma, U. S. A., or to the Progressive Thinker, 
Chicago, I1L, 106 Loomis St., U. S. A. 



»Send for eight page illustrated descriptive pamphlet 
of the whole work. 



SEP 15 1910 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Nov. 2004 

PreservationTechnologles 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



One copy del. to Cat. Div. 



